Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D “Domino” 16 mm Push Buttons

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Illuminated Operators and Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Contacts and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Specifications

Environment Conforming to standards

IEC 947-5-1, IEC 337-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 n°14.

Approvals

In normal operation: CSA, UL ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO: pending.

Protective treatment

“TC” (All climates.)

Ambient air temperature

Storage: from -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F). Operation: from -25 to +60 °C (-13 to +140 °F).

Operating positions

All positions

Vibration resistance

Mushroom head push button: 8 gn; other push buttons: 15 gn(10 Hz < Frequency < 500 Hz) conforming to IEC 68 2-6.

Shock resistance

Push button: 70 gn; mushroom head push button: 15 gn; selector switch: 200 g conforming to IEC 68 2-27.

Electric shock protection

Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030

Degree of protection conforming IEC 529 and NF C 20-010

NEMA Type 1, 4, 4X (indoor), 13 IP 65

Mechanical life

Push button: 1 million operations. Mushroom head push button: 0.1 million operations Selector switch: 0.3 million operations.

Contact block characteristics Rated insulation voltage

Ui = 380 V - degree of pollution: 3 conforming to IEC 947-1.

Rated shock resistance voltage

Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 947-1.

Rated operating characteristics

AC-15: B150, 5 A Continuous; DC-13: Q150, 2.5 A continuous

Contact operation

Slow-make, N.O., slow-break, N.C., N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1 section 3.

Terminal referencing

Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.

Short circuit protection

Fused 6 A gF conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200 For 1 million operations

Rated power conforming to IEC 947-5-1 (electrical durability) Connection by pin or connector

Connection

Voltage V

24

48

60

120

230

380

AC-15

72 VA

144 VA

180 VA

360 VA

460 VA

380 VA

DC-13 (L/R - 15 ms)

144 W

144 W

180 W

120 W

46 W

- Pin 2.8 X 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in) - Printed circuit connector - Female connector (conforming to DIN 41651) + ribbon cable

Marking

File E164353 CCN NKCR

File Class

LR 44087 3211 03

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.

4 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Operators

Bezel Style 8 Round Black

Bezel Style 6 Square Chrome

Bezel Style 5 Square Black

Bezel Style 9 Round Chrome

Non-Illuminated Operators Legends are not included with operators.

Type

Color

D5A2R Momentary Flush Push Button, Square

D8A1G

D5A7Y

Momentary Flush Push Button, Round

Momentary Extended Guard Push Button

DkA2R

Green

DkA2G

Black

DkA2S

White

DkA2W

Yellow

DkA2Y

Blue

DkA2B

Red

DfA1R

Green

DfA1G

Black

DfA1S

White

DfA1W

Yellow

DfA1Y

Blue

DfA1B

Red

D t A7R

Green

D t A7G

Black

D t A7S

White

D t A7W

Yellow

D t A7Y

Blue

D t A7B

Momentary Push Mushroom

Red

D t B1R

Push Maintain/ Rotate Release Mushroom

Red

D t C1R

White

D t E1W

Toggle Switch

D6B1R

Catalog Number

Red

k Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 5 and 6 are available in this style operator. f Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 8 and 9 are available in this style operator. t Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.

D5C1R

D8E1W

Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12 Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10 Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9

5 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs

Bezel Style 5 Square Black

Bezel Style 8 Round Black

Bezel Style 6 Square Chrome

Bezel Style 9 Round Chrome

Selector Switches – Two Position Type

Color

Catalog Number

Black

D t G2S

Key d

D t L30

Black

DtG7S

Color

Catalog Number

Black

D t G3S

Key d

D t L80

Momentary Spring Return Both Sides To Center

Black

D t G4S

Momentary Spring Return Right To Center

Black

D t G5S

Momentary Spring Return Left To Center

Black

D t G6S

Maintained

Momentary Spring Return D5Gkk

Selector Switches – Three Position Type

Maintained

D5L80

Potentiometer Control Knobs (potentiometer not supplied) Type

D8Rkk

Catalog Number

Integrated Mounting

4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length

D t R1S

PCB Board Mounting

4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length

D t R3S

d Key is removable in all positions. Replacement key is 9001Z18, CP1 (key is marked 8D1). t Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.

Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 11-12 Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9

6 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Pilot Lights and Illuminated Operators

Bezel Style 5 Square Black

Bezel Style 8 Round Black

Bezel Style 6 Square Chrome

Bezel Style 9 Round Chrome

Illuminated Operators Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.

Type

D5A2R

Square Momentary Illuminated Push Button

Round Momentary Illuminated Push Button D8A1G

Momentary Illuminated Extended Guard Button

D5A7Y Square Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button

Round Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button D9A1R

Color

Catalog Number

Red

D k A2R

Green

D k A2G

White

D k A2W

Yellow

D k A2Y

Blue

D k A2B

Red

D f A1R

Green

D f A1G

White

D f A1W

Yellow

D f A1Y

Blue

D f A1B

Red

D t A7R

Green

D t A7G

White

D t A7W

Yellow

D t A7Y

Blue

D t A7B

Red

D k A2R

Green

D k A2G

White

D k A2W

Yellow

D k A2Y

Blue

D k A2B

Red

D f A1R

Green

D f A1G

White

D f A1W

Yellow

D f A1Y

Blue

D f A1B

Color

Catalog Number

Pilot Lights Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.

Type

D5V2Y Square Pilot Light

Round Pilot Light D8V1G

Red

D k V2R

Green

D k V2G

White

D k V2W

Yellow

D k V2Y

Blue

D k V2B

Red

D f V1R

Green

D f V1G

White

D f V1W

Yellow

D f V1Y

Blue

D f V1B

t Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator. k Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 5 and 6 are available in this style operator. f Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 8 and 9 are available in this style operator. Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12 Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9

7 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Contacts and Light Modules Contact Blocks Only Type

Contact Arrangement

Catalog Number

N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C.

DU10 DU01 DU11 DU20 DU02 DUB10 DUB01 DUB11 DUB20 DUB02 DV10 DV01 DV11 DV20 DV02 DVB10 DVB01 DVB11 DVB20 DVB02 DR10 DR01 DR11 DR20 DR02

For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. DUkk

DUBkk Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.

DVkk

DVBkk

For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.

For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.

DRkk

DUF Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.

Module With Lamp Holder Only Type DUFB

DVF

Catalog Number

For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9. For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs. For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator. Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.

DUF DUFB DVF DVFB DRF

Module With Lamp Holder And Contacts Contact Arrangement

Type DVFB

DRF For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.

Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9. DUFBkk

DUFkkk

For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.

DVFkkk

DVFBkk

For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.

Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.

DRFkkk

N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. – N.C. N.O. – N.O. N.C. – N.C.

6 to 120 V, 1.2 Watt Max. d Momentary Maintained k DUF10 DUF01 DUF11 DUF20 DUF02 DUFB10 DUFB01 DUFB11 DUFB20 DUFB02 DVF10 DVF01 DVF11 DVF20 DVF02 DVFB10 DVFB01 DVFB11 DVFB20 DVFB02 DRF10 DRF01 DRF11 DRF20 DRF02

DUFR10 DUFR01 DUFR11 DUFR20 DUFR02

N/A

DVFR10 DVFR01 DVFR11 DVFR20 DVFR02

N/A

DRFR10 DRFR01 DRFR11 DRFR20 DRFR02

k Maintained operation is Push on - Push off. d Contact ratings and lamp voltage can be limited by the type of mounting. i.e. printed circuit termination might not carry full current because of the printed circuit board tracing. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12 Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9

8 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Accessories

Type

Z201

Std. Pkg. Qty.t

Catalog Number

Ring Nut Wrench

1

Z201

Lamp Remover Tool

1

Z02

Closing Plate Black-Square

1

Z205

Closing Plate Black-Round

1

Z223

Replacement Mounting Ring Nut

1

Z216

Type

Voltage

Assembly Code

Std. Pkg. Qty. t

Catalog Number

6 Vac

06

10

Z206

12 Vac

12

10

Z207

24 Vac

24

10

Z208

48 Vac

48

10

Z209

60 Vac

60

10

Z210

24 V - Red

R4

5

Z219R

24 V - Green

G4

5

Z219G

24 V - Yellow

Y4

5

Z219Y

120 V - Red

R2

1

Z220R

Z02 Incandescent (T 13⁄4)

LEDk 24 Vac/dc

Z205

LEDk 120 Vac

Std. Pkg. Qty.t

Catalog Number

Printed Circuit Board Adapter For Type DU Contacts Only.

Type

1

Z203

Wire Harness. For Type DU Contacts Only.

10

Z204

Z223

Z216

Type

Z2kk

Z204

Z203

Std. Pkg. Qty.t

Catalog Number

Replacement Key (No 8D1)

1

Z18

Adjustable Spacer (for rear fixing blocks)

4

Z220

Wire clip 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in.)

100

Z231

Ribbon Cable Connector (for 4 wire DR Blocks)

25

Z228

Ribbon Cable Connector (for 6 wire DR Blocks)

25

Z229

k t

For use with illuminated operators of the same color as the LED. Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.

Z18

Z220

Z231

Z22k

9 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Legend Plates Type

Z213

Z215

Legend Plate with Holder Anodized Aluminum

Z221

Z222

Marking

Z214

Z211

Z212

Std. Pkg. Qty.❋

Catalog Number

25

Z215

25

Z213

25

Z222

25

Z221

25 1 1

Z214 Z211 Z212

Legend Plate Holder with Blank Plate Use with D5, D6 bezel Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5 D6 bezel Legend Plate Holder with Blank Legend Use with D5, D6 bezel Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5 D6 bezel Blank Plate● without Holder (For use with all holders) Yellow Contrast Plate-Round, 50 mm Yellow Contrast Plate-Rectangular, 25 mm x 50 mm

Blank Legend Special Engraved O I II O I II O I Close Down Emerg. Stop Fast Forward Hand Auto Hand O Auto High In Inch Jog Low Lower Off Off On On Open Out Raise Reverse Run Slow Start Stop Stop Start Test Up

Legends Only

For D5, D6 Operators Only

For D8, D9 Operators Only

Legend Plate without Holder

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Mylar Inserts

White with White with Black Letters Black Letters Legend Plate for Round for Square without Button Button Holder Illuminated Illuminated Devices Devices Catalog Catalog Catalog Number Number Number

Z215

Z222

Z214

Z214

01D

01A

99Q2●

99R2●

99W2●

99S2●

N/A

N/A

02Q2 03Q2 04Q2 05Q2 34Q2 65Q2 77Q2 82Q2 78Q2 66Q2 21Q2 24Q2 80Q2 72Q2 74Q2 69Q2 81Q2 71Q2 63Q2 85Q2 62Q2 64Q2 73Q2 70Q2 67Q2 75Q2 79Q2 17Q2 18Q2 90Q2 84Q2 76Q2

02R2 03R2 04R2 05R2 34R2 65R2 75R2 82R2 78R2 66R2 21R2 24R2 80R2 72R2 74R2 69R2 81R2 71R2 63R2 85R2 62R2 64R2 73R2 70R2 67R2 75R2 79R2 17R2 18R2 90R2 84R2 76R2

02W2 03W2 04W2 05W2 34W2 65W2 77W2 82W2 78W2 66W2 21W2 24W2 80W2 72W2 74W2 69W2 81W2 71W2 63W2 85W2 62W2 64W2 73W2 70W2 67W2 75W2 79W2 17W2 18W2 90W2 84W2 76W2

03S2 04S2 05S2 34S2 65S2 77S2 82S2 78S2 66S2 21S2 24S2 80S2 72S2 74S2 69S2 81S2 71S2 63S2 85S2 62S2 64S2 73S2 70S2 67S2 75S2 79S2 17S2 18S2 90S2 84S2 76S2

65DE 77DE 82DE 78DE 66DE

65A 77A 82A 78A 66A

80DE 72DE 74DE 69DE 81DE 71DE 63DE

80A 72A 74A 69A 81A 71A 63A

62DE 64DE 73DE 70DE 67DE 75DE 79DE

62A 64A 73A 70A 67A 75A 79A

76DE

76A

● Engraving field is 16 mm x 22 mm. Factory engraving limited to 3 lines of 12 characters (including spaces). Black letters on silver field. ❋ Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.

Legend Plate Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12

10 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Dimensions Mounting conforming to DIN EN 50 007 and IEC 947 for fixing holes with or without anti-rotation pip

13

25 25

9.8

15

9.8

A

A

25

1.5 - 6

16.2 +0.2 -0.0

29

18

18

29

A: d25 D5Gkk D6Gkk

Ø25 D8Gkk D9Gkk

A

1.5 - 6

A: d25 D5LkO D6LkO

6

A

1.5 - 6

Ø25 A: d25 D8LkO D5B1k D9LkO D6B1k Potentiometer heads Integrated fixing

27

1.5 - 6

Ø25 D8B1k D9B1k

Ø25 D5C1R D9C1R

18

8 A

M7 x 0.75

6

A: d25 D5C1R D6C1R Board fixing 27

A

4

A

6

34

M16x1

18

18

M16x1

6

Ø25 D8A7k D9A7k

È 31

È 31

M16x1

A

A

1.5 - 6

6 A: d25 D5A7k D6A7k

M16x1

55

1.5 - 6

Ø25 D5A1k D9A1k

M16x1

18

8

A: d25 D5A2k D6A2k

M16x1

26

20

18

25 25

25

16.2 +0.2 -0.0

18

M16x1

25 1.7

1.7

Heads

without legend plate

25

M16x1

with legend plate

Push-buttons and pilot lights

50 1.5 - 6 A: d25 D5E1W D6E1W

1.5 - 6

1.5 - 6

6

42 - 65

Ø25 D8E1W D9E1W

A: d25 D5R1S D6R1S

Ø25 D8R1S D9R1S

A: d25 D5R3S D6R3S

Ø25 D8R3S D9R3S

Body DVBkk

DRkk 41.5

9.5 13.5

40.5

17

9.5 13.5

42.5

DVkk 40.5

9.5 13.5

DUBkk

17

DUkk 42.5

Wiring Accessories 2.5

12.5

18

5.08

2.5

1 2.1 5

ø1.2

17

15

17

9.5 13.5

Z203 10.16

52

52 All dimensions are in mm's. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Z204

7

DUBkk + Z203

16.5

DUkk + Z204

15.24 22

11 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type D – 16 mm Dimensions Body DUF DUFkk

Pilot lights + contact 18

13

48

18

48 9.5 13.5

A

A

M16x1

M16x1

16

DUFB DUFBkk

17

Pilot lights Head

DVF DVFkk

DVFB DVFBkk

46

46 8

Ø25

D5V2k D8V1k

D5A2k

D8A1k

D6V2k D9V1k

D6A2k

D9A1k

17

A: d 25

DUF DUFkk+Z204

DRF DRFkkk 47

DUFB DUFBkk + Z203

58

58

17

9.5 13.5

9.5 13.5 Head + DVkk DVF DVFkk

Head + DUkk DUF DUFkk + Z204

Head + DUkk DUF DUFkk + Z203

4

48.5

53.5

Adjustable spacer Z220

9.5 13.5

9.5 13.5

9.5 13.5

48.5

Legend plate carrier for square head Z213

for round head Z221

A:

d 25 Z205

44

44

15.5

39 - 58

M16 x 1

A

Blanking Plug

Head +DRkk DRF DRFkkk

58.5

64 48.5

9.5 13.5

1.5 - 6

Ø25

9.5 13.5

1.5 - 6 A: d25

Ø25 Z223 16.2 18.5

25

24.5

25

37 Legend plates Z212

Z211 1.7

17.9

50

50

17.9

1.7

All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4. 16.2

16.2

25

12 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

Type D – 16 mm Dimensions

Type J, O, and XVL – Pilot Lights

Class 9001

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page Type J, Description and Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Type J, Dimensions and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Type O, Description and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Type XVL, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Type XVL, Selection and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

13 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type J – Pilot Lights Description and Selection Pilot Lights, Push-To-Test and Remote Test Pilot Lights

JP1R29

Class 9001 Type J compact pilot lights are designed to be mounted in a .69" (11/16") diameter mounting hole. Each terminal will accept up to two #14 AWG wires (CU only). Type J compact pilot lights meet NEMA Type 4 (watertight) and NEMA Type 13 (oiltight) requirements. Type JT push-to-test pilot lights have contacts built into the encapsulated body. Type JTR remote test pilot lights have dual inputs for one push remote testing – all you need is a push button with a current rating equal to or greater than the total lamp draw. Type JTR remote test pilot lights can also be energized from two separate input signals of the same voltage and polarity. This is done by wiring the “test” terminal to the second input signal. Standard Pilot Light Style/Voltage

JTR1R29

File 25490 Class 3211 03

None

Trans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz Incandescent/120 Vac or dc Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc Other Voltagest LED – 24-28 Vac LED – 24-28 Vdc LED – 120Vac

JP1R29 JP38R29 JP35R29 JPtR29 JP35LRR29 JP35DRR29 JP38LRR29

JP1G29 JP38G29 JP35G29 JPtG29 JP35LGG29 JP35DGG29 JP38LGG29

Yellow k JP1Y29 JP38Y29 JP35Y29 JP tY29 JP35LYY29 JP35DYY29 JP38LYY29

Lamp Volt/Amp

Replacement Lamp

6.3 V, 0.15A 120 V, 0.015A 28 V, 0.040A

2550101020 2550101040 2550101024

28 V, 0.03A 28 V, 0.03A 28 V, 0.03A

(1) (1) (1)

Lamp Volt/Amp

Replacement Lamp

6.3 V, 0.15A 120 V, 0.15A 28 V, 0.040A

2550101020 2550101040 2550101024

28 V, 0.03A 28 V, 0.03A 28 V, 0.03A

(1) (1) (1)

Lamp Volt/Amp

Replacement Lamp

6.3 V, 0.15A 120 V, 0.015A 28 V, 0.040A

2550101020 2550101040 2550101024

28 V, 0.03A

(1)

Push-To-Test Pilot Light Style/Voltage

File E42259 CCN NKCR

JP1 JP38 JP35 JPt – – –

Color Cap Redk Greenk

None

Trans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz Incandescent/120 Vac or dc Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc Other Voltagest LED – 24-28 Vac LED – 24-28 Vdc LED – 120 Vac

JT1 JT38 JT35 JTt – – –

Color Cap Red k Green k JT1R29 JT38R29 JT35R29 JTtR29 JT35LRR29 JT35DRR29 JT38LRR29

JT1G29 JT38G29 JT35G29 JTtG29 JT35LGG29 JT35DGG29 JT38LGG29

Yellow k JT1Y29 JT38Y29 JT35Y29 JTtY29 JT35LYY29 JT35DYY29 JT38LYY29

Remote Test Pilot Light Style/Voltage

None

Trans/110-120 Vac, 50-60 Hz Incandescent/120 Vac Incandescent/24-28 Vac Other Voltages (ac Only)t LED – 24-28 Vac

JTR1 JTR38 JTR35 JTRt –

Color Cap Red k Green k JTR1R29 JTR38R29 JTR35R29 JTRtR29 JTR35LRR29

JTR1G29 JTR38G29 JTR35G29 JTRtG29 JTR35LGG29

Yellow k JTR1Y29 JTR38Y29 JTR35Y29 JTRtY29 JTR35LYY29

(1) See Page 18 for replacement LED lamps. For other voltage LED lamps contact local field office. k Supplied with “plastic” color caps. If “glass” color caps are desired, substitute G26, R26, etc., for G29, R29, etc. Example: JP1G26, JP1R26, etc. To order a pilot light with color cap not listed above, add the color cap type number from the table below to the basic pilot light number. Example: For a standard 120 volt transformer style pilot light with a plastic amber color cap, order a 9001JP1A29. LED lamps are only for use with plastic red, green or yellow color caps. t Remote test (Type JTR) only is available in AC.

Voltage

JP/JT Code

Incandescent/6 Vac or dc Incandescent/12 Vac or dc Incandescent/48 Vac or dc Incandescent/60 Vac or dc

31 32 36 37

Other Voltagest Replacement Volt/Amp Lamp 2550101020 2550101022 2550101025 2550101026

6.3 V, 0.15A 12 V, 0.17A 48 V, 0.053A 60 V, 0.05A

JTR Code

Replacement Lamp

Volt/Amp

31t 32t 36t 37t

2550101003 2550101022 2550101025 2550101026

3 V, 0.16A 12 V, 0.17A 48 V, 0.053A 60 V, 0.05A

14 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type J – Pilot Lights Dimensions and Accessories

Legend Plates Max. No. of Lines

Max. No. of Characters

Catalog Number

Black Field Red Field Black Field Red Field Aluminum Field

2 2 2 2 2

8 8 8 8 16

JN100 JN100R JN199 JN199R JN700

Aluminum Field

2

16

JN799

Type Blank Special Marking (Specify Marking) Blank Special Marking (Specify Marking)

Replacement Color Caps - Class 9001, Type J Catalog Number Plastic Glass

Color Red Green Amber Blue Clear White Yellow

R29 G29 A29 L29 C29 W29 Y29

R26 G26 A26 L26 C26 W26 Y26

Replacement Parts - Class 9001, Type J Type

Catalog Number

Ring Nut 6512909601 Locking Thrust Washer 6512909201 Trim Washer 6512909301 Rubber Sealing Washer 6512901801 Note:Octagonal ringnuts can be tightened with standard tools, or use the reverse end of Square D wrench Class 9001 Type K95.

Type J Dimensions Type JTR1 JP, JT, JTR31 through JTR38

A B 2.83" 1.20"

C .93"

2.34" 1.11"

.84"

15 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type O - Pilot Lights Description and Selection Instrument Type Incandescent Pilot Lights – Class 9001, Type O NEMA 13 Voltage AC/DC

Average Current (Amps)

12 V

Color

0.170

Type O

24 V

Red

OR12

Green

OG12

Amber

OA12

Clear

OC12

Yellow

OY12

White

OW12

Blue (Fluted)

FB12

Red

OR24

Green

OG24

0.073

120 Vt

Catalog Number

Amber

OA24

Clear

OC24

Yellow

OY24

White

OW24

Blue (Fluted)

FB24

Red

OR120

Green

OG120

0.025

Amber

OA120

Clear

OC120

Yellow

OY120

White

OW120

Blue (Fluted)

FB120

t This product is not recommended for continuous use at 120 V.

Replacement Lamps - Class 9001, Type O Voltage

Sylvania Lamp Number

Square D Catalog Number

12 V 24 V 120 V

12PSB 24PSB 120PSB

2550105003 2550105004 2550105005

Color

Catalog Number

Red

2550420020

Replacement Lenses* - Class 9001, Type O

Green

2550420040

Amber

2550420060

Clear

2550420010

Yellow

2550420030

White

2550430040

Blue

2550470010

Minimum Order Quantity 10

Approximate Dimensions 1.84 47 0.41 10

max panel thickness

0.81 21

0.68 mtg hole 17.5 required A30064-963

0.20 5 0.02 thickness .5

width

Dual Dimensions inches mm

16 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights Specifications General This new Telemecanique range of LED pilot lights meets the very latest requirements in signalling techniques. Because of their small size, Ø8 and Ø12 mm fixing pilot lights are particularly suitable for the following applications: • mounting on small control stations. • shallow depth mounting. • large number of signalling units on a control station (low power dissipation). Small diameter LED pilot lights also have sealed front faces (IP 65 option available). An unsealed Ø8 mm fixing model with protruding LED and black bezel (aesthetic appearance) is also offered. Advantages: LED pilot lights have many advantages: • very long life and so low maintenance costs (bulb test no longer required). • highly resistant to shocks, vibrations and over-voltage. • low power consumption which, for example, allows compatibility with programmable controller outputs by parallel connection with the load, to give a direct indication of output state. • very high reliability. Quick fixing by means of tags for soldered clips for Ø8 mm type, or threaded connectors Ø12 mm type. Safe connection due to integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection device. Conforming to standards

IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660-200.

Protective treatment

Standard version: “TC” treatment.

Ambient temperature

Operation: -25 °C to + 70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F). Storage: -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F).

Electric shock protection

Class III conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Degree of protection

IP 40 (IP 65 with seal) conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010.

Current consumption

25 mA.

Rated Insulation voltage

50 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.

Life

Can exceed 100,000 hours.

—) Voltage limits including ripple (---

0.8 UN ≤ U ≤1.2 Un.

Terminal referencing

Polarity marked + – conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.

Cabling

XVLA1kk, XVLA2kk: tags for 2.8 x 0.5 mm quick connectors, also for soldered connections. XVLA3kk: threaded connectors, clamping, capacity: min. 1 - 26 AWG solid or stranded, max. 1 - 16 AWG solid or stranded.

Dimensions LED pilot lights O8, with black bezel, visible LED XVL-A1..

O 8, with lens incorporated, protected LED XVL-A2

E

E

E M8 x 0,5 O 16

M12 x 1

O10

O12

M8 x 0.5

12 1.5

O 12, with lens incorporated, protected LED XVL-A3

10

12

32

1.5

E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm

6

34

E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm

45

E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 6 mm

All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Marking

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

File E164353 CCN NKCR2

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 230.

17 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights Selection and Accessories

With Black Bezel, Raised LED Description

Supply Voltage DC

Color

XVLA113

Red

XVLA114

5V

XVLA1kk

Ø8 mm with integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection diode

12 V

Degree of protection IP 40

24 V

Catalog Number

Green Orange-yellow

XVLA115

Green

XVLA123

Red

XVLA124

Orange-yellow

XVLA125

Green

XVLA133

Red

XVLA134

Orange-yellow

XVLA135

Green

XVLA143

Red

XVLA144

Orange-yellow

XVLA145

48 V

With Integral Lens Cap, Covered LED Description

Supply Voltage DC

Color

XVLA213

Red

XVLA214

5V XVLA2kk

(1) Ø8 mm with integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection diode

12 V

Degree of protection IP 40

24 V

Orange-yellow

XVLA215

Green

XVLA223

Red

XVLA224

Orange-yellow

XVLA225

Green

XVLA233

Red

XVLA234

Orange-yellow

XVLA235

Green

XVLA243

Red

XVLA244

48 V

Orange-yellow

XVLA245

Green

XVLA313

Red

XVLA314

5V XVLA3kk

(2) Ø12 mm with integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection diode

12 V

Degree of protection IP 40

24 V

XVL-X..

Orange-yellow

XVLA315

Green

XVLA323

Red

XVLA324

Orange-yellow

XVLA325

Green

XVLA333

Red

XVLA334

Orange-yellow

XVLA335

Green

XVLA343

Red

XVLA344

Orange-yellow

XVLA345

48 V

XVLXkk

Catalog Number

Green

Accessories Description

XVLZ91k

XVL-Z91.

Catalog Number

Tightening tools (Sold singly)

For Ø8 mm pilot lights

XVLX08

For Ø12 mm pilot lights

XVLX12

Seals (IP 65) (Sold in lots of 10)

For Ø8 mm pilot lights

XVLZ911

For Ø12 mm pilot lights

XVLZ912

1 Quick Connects (2.8 mm x 0.5 mm) 2 Screw Termination

18 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm, Double Insulated

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Illuminated Operators and Selector Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Square Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Legend Plate Carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 XALB General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 XALB Enclosures and Base Mounted Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 XALB Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 XA2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Double Insulated Environment XB2B, XD2P: IEC-947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14. CSA and UL: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600 - Q600, pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V) Approvals ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU, VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS XD2P, standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS. Protective treatment Standard Version: “TC” (all climates). Ambient temperature Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F.). Operating: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F.). 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5g (from 40 to 50 Hz) Resistance to vibration conforming to IEC 68-2-6. Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g. Resistance to shock Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27. Electric shock protection XB2B, XD2P: Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF 20-030. NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 4, 4x, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P. Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted). and NEC 20-010. IP 40: double-headed push buttons (IP 65 on request). Push buttons -- 3 million operations. Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations. (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Mechanical life Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the warranty offered on this product, please refer to the Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.) Conformity to standards

Contact block characteristics Nominal thermal current Nominal insulation voltage Insulation catagory Contact operation Contact resistance Operating force Terminal referencing Short circuit protection Rated power conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix C duty categories AC15-DC13 Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hour Load factor: 0.5 AC supply (50-60 Hz)

10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600. 500V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600V conforming to UL 508, 600v conforming to CSA 22-2 No. 14. Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110. Slow-make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1 Section 3. ≤25 mΩ conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3. Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lb Additional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb. Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013. 10 A cartridge fuses, g1 or N conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200.

DC supply Power broken in watts for 1 million operations Voltage 24 V 48 V 120 V Inductive 65 W 48 W 40 W load

File E164353 CCN NKCR File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

millions of operations

AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600 127 V 220 V 24/48 V

1

35% Power factor

06 04

Volts

Make Amperes

VA

Break Amperes

02

120 240 480 600

60 30 15 12

7200 7200 7200 7200

6 3 1.5 1.2

ith = 10 A

01 .06 .04

VA

Continuous carrying Amperes

720 720 720 720

10 10 10 10

Resistive 75% Power factor Make, Break and continuous Amperes 10 10 10 10

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.

DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600 Inductive and resistive

.02

Volts

Make and break

Continuous

.01

125

0.55

2.5

250

0.27

2.5

600

0.10

2.5

1

Cabling

Marking

2

4 6 10 20 40 60 current in amperes

XB2B, XD2P: Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5mm2 (20 AWG), solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm2(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or by cable clips conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).

XA2B Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23 XA2B Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25-27 XA2B Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 24 Contact Blocks & Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28

Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31 Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 35

20 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Non-Illuminated Operators Operator Type

Size

Flush head

Flush head ZA2BA• Flush head premarked

Transparent flush head ZA2BA•8

Transparent flush head (for use with ZB2BY1• stick on legends see page 30)

Extended head

Extended head ZA2BL•

Extended head premarked

Silicone booted head Booted head ZA2BP• Neoprene booted head

Flush plunger (with full guard)

Flush plunger (with half guard)

Two flush Two flush premarked Two button operators

One flush, one extended One flush, one extended premarked

Color White Black Green Red Yellow Blue Grey Green “START” Green “ON” White “I” Black “O” Green “I” Red “O” Red “STOP” Red “OFF” Green Red Yellow Blue Clear White Black Green Red Yellow Blue Red “STOP” Red “O” Red “OFF” Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black/Red Green/Red Black/Red “I/O” Green/Red “I/O” Black/Red “START/STOP” Green/Red “START/STOP” Black/Red Green/Red Black/Red “I/O” Green/Red “I/O” Black/Red “START/STOP” Green/Red “START/STOP”

Catalog Number ZA2BA1 ZA2BA2 ZA2BA3 ZA2BA4 ZA2BA5 ZA2BA6 ZA2BA8 ZA2BA333 ZA2BA341 ZA2BA131 ZA2BA232 ZA2BA331 ZA2BA432 ZA2BA434 ZA2BA435 ZA2BA38 ZA2BA48 ZA2BA58 ZA2BA68 ZA2BA78 ZA2BL1 ZA2BL2 ZA2BL3 ZA2BL4 ZA2BL5 ZA2BL6 ZA2BL434 ZA2BL432 ZA2BL435 ZA2BP2 ZA2BP3 ZA2BP4 ZA2BP5 ZA2BP6 ZA2BP02 ZA2BP03 ZA2BP04 ZA2BP05 ZA2BP06 ZA2BA24 ZA2BA34 ZA2BA44 ZA2BA54 ZA2BA64 ZA2BA22 ZA2BA32 ZA2BA42 ZA2BA52 ZA2BA62 ZA2BA9124 ZA2BA9134 ZA2BA9224 ZA2BA9234 ZA2BA9724 ZA2BA9734 ZA2BL9324 ZA2BL9334 ZA2BL9424 ZA2BL9434 ZA2BL9824 ZA2BL9834

Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29

21 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates Operator Type

Size

30 mm Mushroom Head Momentary 30 mm ZA2BC•4

Mushroom head momentary 40 mm

60 mm 30 mm Mushroom Head Momentary 40 mm ZA2BC•

Mushroom head Latching Push-Pull

40 mm 60 mm

Mushroom head Latching Turn to Release Mushroom head Latching, Turn to Release Trigger Actionf

Mushroom Head Turn to Release 40 mm ZA2BS54

Mushroom head Latching Key to Releasej Mushroom head Latching, Key to Release Trigger Actionfj

30 mm 40 mm 60 mm 30 mm 40 mm 30 mm 40 mm 60 mm 30 mm 40 mm

Color

Catalog Number

Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black Green Red Yellow Blue Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red

ZA2BC24 ZA2BC34 ZA2BC44 ZA2BC54 ZA2BC64 ZA2BC2 ZA2BC3 ZA2BC4 ZA2BC5 ZA2BC6 ZA2BR2 ZA2BR4 ZABT24 ZABT44 ZA2T2 ZA2BT4 ZA2BX2 ZA2BX4 ZA2BS44 ZA2BS54 ZA2BS64 ZA2BS834 ZA2BS844 ZA2BS74 ZA2BS14 ZA2BS24 ZA2BS934 ZA2BS944

f Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers, contact local field office.

Mushroom Head Key to Release 40 mm ZA2BS14

Key Number

Suffix

421

12

458A

10

520

14

3131A

20

j Trigger action mushroom heads are "tamper proof" whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.

ERGEN M

Y C

E

Yellow Contrast Plates▼

ST

OP

ZB2BY8330

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter Text

Language

Catalog Number

Blank Emergency Stop Arret d’Urgence Not Aus Parada de Emergencia Arresto Emergenza

N/A English French German Spanish Italian

ZB2BY9101 ZB2BY9330 ZB2BY9130 ZB2BY9230 ZB2BY9430 ZB2BY9630

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter Text

Language

Catalog Number

Blank Emergency Stop Arret d’Urgence Not Aus Parada de Emergencia Arresto Emergenza

N/A English French German Spanish Italian

ZB2BY8101 ZB2BY8330 ZB2BY8130 ZB2BY8230 ZB2BY8430 ZB2BY8630

▼ Yellow Contrast Plates comply with EN418 of the European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

22 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches Non-illuminated selector switches Type

Catalog Number

Positions, Action

Standard handle or extended lever t Standard ZA2BD•

2-maintained 2-spring return from right to left 3-maintained 3-spring return to center from left and right 3-spring return from right to center 3-spring return from left to center

ZA2BD2 ZA2BD4 ZA2BD3 ZA2BD5 ZA2BD8 ZA2BD7

Key selectors Type

Positions, Action

Extended ZA2BJ• Key switch f

Key Switch ZA2BG•

2-maintained 2-maintained 2-spring return right to left 3-maintained 3-maintained 3-maintained 3-maintained 3-spring return to center from left and right 3-spring return to center from left 3-spring return to center from right

Key removal

Catalog Number

Left Left, Right Left All Center Left, Right Left

ZA2BG2 ZA2BG4 ZA2BG6 ZA2BG0 ZA2BG3 ZA2BG5 ZA2BG9

Center

ZA2BG7

Right

ZA2BG1

Center

ZA2BG8

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 28) 2 Position selector switch

3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide O X O

Contact block guide

X O X

1 N.O. (left or right) 1 N.C. (left or right) 1 N.O. and X O 1 N.C. Note: View from front of panel

X O O X O X

O X O X X O

O O X O X X

1 N.O. (left) 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side) 1 N.O. (right) 1 N.C. (right) 1 N.C. (left) 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)

Toggle switch Description

Color

Catalog Number

Two position toggle switch

Black

ZA2BD28

Reset buttons (Mechanical overload resets 10 mm travel) Toggle Switch ZA2BD28

NEMA Type 4X (not suitable for use with ZA2BZ10• body/contact assemblies)

Blank Flush with legend

O R

Extended with legend O head Plunger (may be trimmed to length desired) The total operating distance may be set between 17 and 120 mm, as measured from the front face of the panel.

Green Red Blue Red Blue

ZA2BA83 ZA2BA84 ZA2BA86 ZA2BA8401 ZA2BA8602

Red

ZA2BL8401 ZA2BZ13

When ordering extended lever, substitute “J” for “D” in part number (No additional cost). Example: ZA2BD3 becomes ZA2BJ3 f Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For other key numbers contact local field office. For switches keyed with different keys, add the following suffixes: t

ZA2BA8602

Key Number

Suffix

421 458A 520 3131A

12 10 14 20

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20 Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31

23 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Pilot Lights and Light Modules Pilot light head Type

Color

Catalog Number

White

Standard Standard ZA2BV0•

Special lens for neon and LED lamps

ZA2BV01

Green

ZA2BV03

Red

ZA2BV04

Amber

ZA2BV05

Blue

ZA2BV06

Clear

ZA2BV07

Green

ZA2BV033

Red

ZA2BV043

Amber

ZA2BV053

Blue

ZA2BV063

Clear

ZA2BV073

Pilot light modules ZA2BV6

Type

Catalog Number

Direct supply (bulb included) a (AC/DC)

ZA2BV6a

Transformer type (AC only) 1.2 VA/6 V (bulb included)f

ZA2BV3

24 V

ZA2BV1

48 V

ZA2BV2

110/120 V

ZA2BV3

220/240 V

ZA2BV94

440/480 V

ZA2BV95

550/660 V

ZA2BV98

Resistor type 130 V (bulb included) 220/250 V

ZA2BV7

a Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage. f Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.

Lamps Voltage AC/DC

Type Incandescent Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)

DLICE • • • (incandescent)

Neon (use with direct supply light module)

Type

DLICJUS • • • (LED)

LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks

LED, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules

Watts

Catalog Number

6

1.5

DL1CB006

12

2.0

DL1CE012

24

2.0

DL1CE024

48

2.4

DL1CE048

130

2.6

120

-

NE51HRT120V

220

-

NE51HRT220V

380

-

NE51HRT380V

Color

Voltage

Part Number

DL1CE130

Green

6 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0063

Red

6 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0064

Amber

6 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0065

Green

12 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0123

Red

12 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0124

Amber

12 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0125

Green

24 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0243

Red

24 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0244

Amber

24 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS0245

Green

120 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS1203

Red

120 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS1204

Amber

120 Vac/dc

DL1CJUS1205

Green

9 Vac only

DL1CJUS0093

Red

9 Vac only

DL1CJUS0094

Amber

9 Vac only

DL1CJUS0095

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Replacement parts (bulbs & lenses). . . . . . . . . . . Page 30 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29

Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

24 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Illuminated Operators Illuminated operators Type

Color

Flush head Flush head ZA2BW3• Flush head for neon and LED lamps

Extended head Extended head ZA2BW1• Extended head for neon and LED lamps

With half guard Half guard ZA2BW3•2

Illuminated Turn-to-Release mushroom head Amber indicator Two flush

Turn to release ZA2BW7•

Two flush premarked Two button momentary action operators NEMA Type 1 only f

Amber indicator One flush, one extended One flush extended, premarked

f

Catalog Number

White Green Red Amber Blue Clear Green Red Amber Blue Clear White Green Red Amber Blue Clear Green Red Amber Blue Clear White Green Red Amber Blue Clear Green Red Yellow Blue Clear Black/Red Green/Red Black/Red “I/O” Green/Red “I/O” Black/Red “Start/Stop” Green/Red “Start/Stop” Black/Red

ZA2BW31 ZA2BW33 ZA2BW34 ZA2BW35 ZA2BW36 ZA2BW37 ZA2BW333 ZA2BW343 ZA2BW353 ZA2BW363 ZA2BW373 ZA2BW11 ZA2BW13 ZA2BW14 ZA2BW15 ZA2BW16 ZA2BW17 ZA2BW133 ZA2BW143 ZA2BW153 ZA2BW163 ZA2BW173 ZA2BW312 ZA2BW332 ZA2BW342 ZA2BW352 ZA2BW362 ZA2BW372 ZA2BW73 ZA2BW74 ZA2BW75 ZA2BW76 ZA2BW77 ZA2BW81254 ZA2BW81354 ZA2BW82254 ZA2BW82354 ZA2BW87254 ZA2BW87354 ZA2BW83254

Green/Red

ZA2BW83354

Black/Red “I/O” Green/Red “I/O” Black/Red “Start/Stop” Green/Red “Start/Stop”

ZA2BW84254 ZA2BW84354 ZA2BW88254 ZA2BW88354

To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4 & 13 order silicon boot ZB2BW008.

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20 Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29 Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31

25 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Illuminated Selector Switches Selector Switches Number of positions, action 2-maintained

Illuminated selector ZA2BK1••

Catalog Number

Color Green

ZA2BK123

Red

ZA2BK124

Amber

ZA2BK125

Blue

ZA2BK126

Clear

ZA2BK127

2-spring return

Green

ZA2BK143

from right to left

Red

ZA2BK144

3-maintained

3-spring return to center from right and left

3-spring return from right to center

3-spring return from left to center

Amber

ZA2BK145

Blue

ZA2BK146

Clear

ZA2BK147

Green

ZA2BK133

Red

ZA2BK134

Amber

ZA2BK135

Blue

ZA2BK136

Clear

ZA2BK137

Green

ZA2BK153

Red

ZA2BK154

Amber

ZA2BK155

Blue

ZA2BK156

Clear

ZA2BK157

Green

ZA2BK183

Red

ZA2BK184

Amber

ZA2BK185

Blue

ZA2BK186

Clear

ZA2BK187

Green

ZA2BK173

Red

ZA2BK174

Amber

ZA2BK175

Blue

ZA2BK176

Clear

ZA2BK177

Selector Switch Sequences (using light module/contact block assemblies, page 28) 2 Position selector switch

3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide O X O

X O X

1 N.O. (left or right) 1 N.C. (left or right) 1 N.O. and X O 1 N.C. Note: View from front of panel

Contact block guide X O O X O X

O X O X X O

O O X O X X

1 N.O. (left) 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side) 1 N.O. (right) 1 N.C. (right) 1 N.C. (left) 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29 Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

26 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Square Push Buttons Standard operators t Description

Type

Flush

ZA2CAk

Push buttons

Extended head

Color

Catalog Number

Black

ZA2CA2

Green

ZA2CA3

Red

ZA2CA4

Yellow

ZA2CA5

Blue

ZA2CA6

Black

ZA2CL2

Green

ZA2CL3

Red

ZA2CL4

Yellow

ZA2CL5

Blue

ZA2CL6

White

ZA2CV01

Standard pilot lightsf

ZA2CVO k

Green

ZA2CV03

Red

ZA2CV04

Yellow

ZA2CV05

Blue

ZA2CV06

Clear

ZA2CV07

White

ZA2CW31

Illuminated push buttonsj

Flush push button heads

ZA2CW1k Projecting push button heads

Green

ZA2CW33

Red

ZA2CW34

Yellow

ZA2CW35

Blue

ZA2CW36

Clear

ZA2CW37

White

ZA2CW11

Green

ZA2CW13

Red

ZA2CW14

Yellow

ZA2CW15

Blue

ZA2CW16

Clear

ZA2CW17

Accessories for square push buttons Mounting Tool t f j

Ring Nut Wrench and Lens Extractor

ZA2CZ12

For use with contact block assemblies, page 28. For use with pilot light modules, page 24. For use with light module / contact block assemblies, page 28.

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Contact Block Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

27 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Contact Block Assemblies Contact block assemblies contact blocks and mounting collar for XA2B pilot devices s Contacts N.O. N.C.

Description 1 Contact block

Contact block with mounting collar ZA2BZ101

2 Contact blocks

Catalog Number

1

-

ZA2BZ101

-

1

ZA2BZ102

2

-

ZA2BZ103

-

2

ZA2BZ104

1

1

ZA2BZ105

Additional contact blocks u Description For converting body/contact assemblies to 3, 4, 5 or 6 contacts max or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blocks Additional contact block ZB2BE10k

Contact N.O. N.C.

■

Type

Catalog Number

Standard

ZB2BE101

Standard

ZB2BE102

Mounting collar only for attaching contact block(s) to operator heads

ZA2BZ009

Light module assemblies mounting collar with light module and contact blocks for XA2B pilot devicess Contacts N.O. N.C.

Description

Catalog Number

Direct supply incandescent bulb included (AC/DC) j Mounting collar ZA2BZ009

Without contacts

1

-

ZA2BW061+

1 Contact block

-

1

ZA2BW062+

2

-

ZA2BW063+

-

2

ZA2BW064+

1

1

ZA2BW065+

2 Contact blocks

Transfomer type (1.2 VA/6 V incandescent bulb included) (AC only)fj Without contacts◆

1

-

1 Contact block

-

1

ZA2BW0 t2

2

-

ZA2BW0 t3

-

2

ZA2BW0t4

1

1

ZA2BW0t5

2 Contact blocks Transformer type ZA2BWOt1

ZA2BW0 t1

Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply 2 Contact blocks

1

1

ZA2BW075

■ N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3. + Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage. t Select proper digit for desired primary voltage: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2 (48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz) 94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz). f Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field for details. u Non- illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contact blocks maximum (3 decks of 2). j Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contact blocks maximum (2 decks of 2). s Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BE101 becomes ZB2BE1013.

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Replacement Parts (bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

28 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Legend Plate Carriers Legend plate carriers (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices Complete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, with standard text. “Start” functions: white characters on black. “Stop” functions: white characters on red.

Catalog Number

Standard texts

Standard text ZA2BZ32326

30 x 40 mm Carrier only ZA2BZ32

Standard texts

Catalog Number

Auto-Hand

ZA2BZ32364

Off

Auto-O-Hand

ZA2BZ32385

On

ZA2BZ32312 ZA2BZ32311

Off-On

ZA2BZ32367

Open

ZA2BZ32313

Auto

ZA2BZ32115

Power On

ZA2BZ32326

Close

ZA2BZ32314

Reset

ZA2BZ32323

Down

ZA2BZ32308

Reverse

ZA2BZ32306

Emergency Stop

ZA2BZ32330

Run

ZA2BZ32334

Fast

ZA2BZ32328

Slow

ZA2BZ32327

Forward

ZA2BZ32305

Start

ZA2BZ32303

Hand

ZA2BZ32316

Stop

ZA2BZ32304

Inch

ZA2BZ32321

Up

ZA2BZ32307

Hand-O-Auto

ZA2BZ32387

Description Complete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, blank

Color

Catalog Number

Black or red background

ZA2BZ32101

White or yellow background

Legend plate carriers only

ZA2BZ32102 ZA2BZ32

Snap in blank only (27 X 8 mm)

Black or red background

ZA2BY4101

White or yellow background

ZA2BY4102

Legend plate carriers (30 x 50 mm) for XA2Bf pilot devices Description 30 x 50 mm ZA2BZ33

Complete with “snap-in” (27 x 18 mm) legend plates, blank

Color

Catalog Number

Black or red background

ZA2BZ33101

White or yellow background

Legend plate carriers only

ZA2BZ33102 ZA2BZ33

Snap in blank only (27 x 18 mm)

Black or red background

ZA2BY5101

White or yellow background

ZA2BY5102

Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices With “snap-in” blank legend plate

Black or red background White or yellow background

ZA2BZ34101 ZA2BZ34102

Legend plate carriers only

ZA2BZ34

No legend square aspect ring

ZA2BZ31

Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 50 mm) for XA2B pilot devices 30 x 40 mm Square aspect ZA2BZ34

With “snap-in” blank legend plate

Black or red background White or yellow background

Legend plate carriers only

ZA2BZ35101 ZA2BZ35102 ZA2BZ35

30 x 50 mm Square aspect ZA2BZ35

29 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Accessories and Replacement Parts Accessories Type

Description

Guards/Locks Closing plates 22 mm Closing plate ZB2SZ3

Miscellaneous Accessories Tools

Push on/push off mechanism ZB2BZ21

Mylar circular legends for use with transparent flush head operators See page 21

Catalog Number

60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic) no padlocking provision

ZB2BZ19

Black plastic Gray plastic Blue metallic Add on push-on/push-off mechanism Bulb extractor for use with BA9s Ring nut wrench Lense removal key No text O I Auto Hand Off On Start Stop Forward Reverse

ZB2SZ3 ZB2SZ4 ZB2SZ2 ZB2BZ21 XBFX13 ZA2BZ905 ZB2BZ8 ZB2BY1101 ZBZBY1146 ZBZBY1147 ZB2BY1115 ZB2BY1316 ZB2BY1312 ZB2BY1311 ZB2BY1303 ZB2BY1304 ZB2BY1305 ZB2BY1306

Replacement Parts Type

Mylar circular legend

ZB2BVkkk

Replacement lenses

ZB2-BV...

Replacement ring nut ZB2BW93k

ZB2-BW93.

Replacement boots Replacement keys

ZB2BP012

ZB2-BP012 + j

Description Lens – standard pilot light Lens kit – standard pilot light (includes lens, diffuser and gasket) Lens – pilot light (jeweled for LED and Neon) Lens – flush illuminated push buttons Lens – flush illuminated push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) Lens – extended push buttons Lens – extended push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) Lens – push-to-test Lens – rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series (2 button with indicator) Lens – 40 mm mushroom Standard nut for all operators Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BP series operators Replacement neoprene booty for ZB2BP series operators Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1- Ronis key #455. Key #421 Qty. 1 Key #458A Qty. 1 Key #520 Qty. 1 Key #3131A Qty. 1

Catalog Number ZB2BV01k ZB2BV02k ZB2BV01k3 ZB2BW91k ZB2BW93k3 ZB2BW93k ZB2BW93k3 ZB2BV01k1 ZB2BW90k W4042926400k ZB2BBZ901 ZB2BP01j ZB2BP02j Q99900901 Q99900911 Q99900910 Q99900912 Q99900915

Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1-white, 3-green, 4-red, 5-amber, 6-blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white. Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue). Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.

Q99900901

Q99900901

ZA2 BZ901

ZA2-BZ901

30 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

ZA2BL•

.47 12

1.22 31

1.57 40

ZA2B•••

1.18 30 ZA2BS844

1.18 30

1.22 31

ZA2BS74

.66 17

ZA2BS834

2.36 60

1.57 40

1.18 30

ZA2B (with 30 x 40 legend plate carrier)

ZA2B•••

ZA2CL•

.65 16.5

.66 17

.66 17

ZA2B•••

ZA2BP•

1.57 40

dia. 1.18 30

E

ZA2CA•

1.18 30

Control units (operating heads) ZA2BA••

1.18 30

Panel cut-out (Thickness E = 1 to 5 mm)

1.18 30

XA2B 22 mm Dimensions

1.89 48

1.22 31

ZA2BS14

1.89 48

ZA2BS24

ZA2BS9•4

ZA2BW8•••4

55

19

ZA2BW8•••4

1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 30

1.18 30

.78 20

36.5

42

33

42

ZA2BV3, BV4, BV5

33

42

42

ZA2BV7

29

(bodies) ZA2BV6

60

ZA2BK1••

55

ZA2BW1••

ZA2BG•

.94 24

ZA2BVO•

55

ZA2BW3••

1.91 48.5

1.00 25.5

16.5

1.18 30

.27 7

ZA2BJ••

30

1.57 40

1.14 29 1.65 42 .94 24

.94 24

1.22 31

1.00 25.5

1.18 30

Mounting collar ZA2BZ009

O 30

.94 24

ZA2BD••

.59 15

O 30

1.69 43

.94 24

ZA2BL••34

.43 11 Body contact assemblies ZA2BZ10•

1.22 31

1.67 42.5

1.67 42.5

1.57 40

ZA2BA••34

1.18 30

.94 24

1.22 31

1.18 30

.94 24

2.36 60

1.18 30

ZA2B (with 30 x 50 legend plate carrier)

1.57 40

1.18 30

25.5

19

11

15

All dimensions are in mm. To convert to inches, divide mm by 25.4. 31 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XALB General Purpose Control Stations The XALB line of standard push button wall stations are in IEC Type IP65, plastic enclosures for indoor and outdoor use. The units have UL, CSA, and IEC approvals. The enclosures are provided with 4 to 8 cable entry knockouts. Two knockouts are in the base. A cross reference between the base (contact blocks) and the cover (operators) is provided to avoid confusion. Wiring diagram

Nameplates

1 push button

Start

XALB101

1 push button

Stop

XALB111

1 push button (mushroom head)

N/A

XALB164

1 push button (mushroom head) Turn to release

XALJ174

1 push button (mushroom head) Turn to release “No Tease”

XALJ178

1 push button (mushroom head) key to release

N/A* XALJ184

1 push button (mushroom head) key to release “No Tease”

Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.

XALJ188

2 push buttons

Start Stop

2 push buttons

Forward Reverse

1 pilot light 2 push buttons

Start Stop

XALB371

3 push buttons

Forward Reverse Stop

XALB311

3 push buttons

Up Down Stop

XALB321

3 push buttons

Open Close Stop

XALB341

File E164353 CCN NKCR

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

Part Number

Operators

XALB211

120V max

XALB221

* Yellow cover per EN418 of European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC

32 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XALB Enclosures and Base Mounted Components XALB Wall Stations use ZA2B operators, special base mounted contact blocks and light modules. Legends used are ZB2BYkk type from page 57. Empty Enclosures Description

Number of Holes

Part Number

1

XALB01

2

XALB02

3

XALB03

4

XALB04

5

XALB05

1

XALJ01

Light grey lid with dark grey base

Yellow lid with grey base XALB03

Contact Blocks (base mounted) Symbol

Function

Part Number

3

Description

1 N/O

XENL1111

1 N/C

XENL1121

4

Slow make

1

Slow break, direct opening

2

XENL1111

Contact Blocks (operator mounted) Description

Symbol

Slow make, Slow break, (direct opening)

XALV6

21

13

31

22

14

32

Function 2 N/C, 1N/O

ZA2BZ141

Pilot Light Bodies Description

Supply Voltage

Direct supply bulb included (AC/DC) j

Part Number XALV6

Transformer Type (AC only) (1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft Direct through resistor BA9s, 130 V bulb included XALW6

Part Number

120 V Primary

XALV3

240 V Primary

XALV94

480 V Primary

XALV95

230-240 V

XALV7

Illuminated Push Button Bodies (1 N/C + 1 N/O) Description

Supply Voltage

Part Number

Direct supply (bulb included) (AC/DC) j

≤ 400 V

XALW6

120 V Primary

XALW3

240 V Primary

XALW94

480 V Primary

XALW95

230-240 V

XALW7

Transformer Type (AC only) (1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft Direct through resistor BA9s, 130 V bulb included j f t

Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. Replacement bulbs available on page 24. If desired without bulb, omit voltage. Base mounted transformer light modules require a separately mounted transformer which mounts in the open next to the light module (hole blanking plug provided). Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.

Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23 Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 34

33 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XALB Dimensions Single-way control stations XALB01, XALJ01, XALB1kk, XALJ1kk (6)

2xø4.3

=

1.57 40

(2) 77 mm with selector switch

=

=

2.68 68

(1) 62 mm with push button

=

=

=

(5)

2.0 51 (1) (2)

=

=

=

2.13 54

2.68 68

(3) (4)

(3) 82 mm with mushroom head push button

=

(4) 102 mm with trigger action mushroom head push button (5) 2 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands

4.17 106

(6) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base

=

2-way control stations XALB02, XALB2kk

=

=

=

(1)

1.9 48 2.68 68 =

=

=

=

4.10 104

1.18 30

2xØ4.3 (2)

=

2.0 51 2.4 62

=

=

2.67 68

(1) 4 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands

1.57 = 40 2.13 54

(2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base

= =

=

(2)

3.86 98

1.77 45

3.07 78

2xø4.3

=

(3)

=

=

=

1.18 30

5.28 134

1.18 30

=

3-way control stations XALB03, XALB3kk

2.4 62 2.52 64 (1)

=

2.0 51

=

= =

2.68 68

1.57 40 2.13 54

(1) Pilot light

=

(2) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands

=

(3) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base

4 and 5-way control stations XALB04, B05 2xØ4.3

(1)

=

=

H

H1

H2

=

(2)

=

=

=

1.18 30

1.18 30

b

1.18 30

1.18 30

=

=

2.40 62(ZA2-BA...)

2.0 51 2.51 64(ZA2-BVO.) 2.56 65(ZA2-BP.) 3.22 / 82 (ZA2-BC44.BS44)

=

= 2.60 66

Dual Dimensions:

= =

1.57 40 2.13 54

= =

XAL b

H

H1

H2

B04

164 128 108 62

B05

194 158 138 72

(1) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands (2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base

Inches Millimeters

34 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XA2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions Panel cut-out: (legend plate carrier included)

+ 0.2

24.10

+ 0.4

3.3 0

+ 0.4

1

5 mm

+ 0.4

22.3 0

22.3 0

Legend plate carrier mounting:

Fixing the operating head onto the body: clic

clic Removing the body:

1

2

3

35 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

Modified Panels by Square D

Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup. Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging from standard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies. In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, and dimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed. For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.

36 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Two Button Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Specialty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Reset Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Light Module Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Specialty Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 XAPA Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 XAPG Diecast Metal Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 XAPE Flush Mount Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 XB2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm General Characteristics Environment Conformity to standards Approvals

Protective treatment Ambient temperature Resistance to vibration Resistance to shock Protection against electric shock Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010 Mechanical life

XB2B, XD2P: UL 508, IEC 947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC337-2, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 No. 14, CSA C 22-2 No. 66 UL: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600; pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V) CSA: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600. pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V). ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS XD2P, standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS. Standard version: TC “All climates” Operating: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F) Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F ) 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5 g (from 40 to 50 Hz) Conforming to IEC 68-2-6. Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push-buttons: 15 g. Selector switches: 200 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27. XB2B, XD2P: Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030. NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P: IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted). IP 66: booted and mushroom head push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights and small joystick controllers (mounted). IP 40: double- headed push buttons (IP 65 on request). Push buttons—3 million operations (Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations). The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.

Contact block characteristics Nominal thermal current Nominal insulation voltage

10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600. 500 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600 V conforming to UL 508, 600 V conforming to CSA 22-2 No. 14. Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110. Slow- make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1 section 3. ≤25 mΩ conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3. Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lb Additional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb. Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013. 10 A cartridge fuses, Gl or N conforming to IEC 269-1and VDE 0660-200.

Insulation catagory Contact operation Contact resistance Operating force Terminal referencing Short circuit protection

millions of operations

Rated power conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix C duty categories AC11-DC11 Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hour Load factor: 0.5 AC supply (50-60 Hz)

127 V 220 V 24/48 V

1

DC supply Power broken in watts for 1 million operations

File E164353 CCN NKCR

Voltage

24 V 48 V 120 V

Inductive load

65 W 48 W 40 W File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600 35% Power factor

ith = 10 A

Resistive 75% Continuous Power factor carrying Make, Break and Amperes continuous Amperes

Volts

Make Amperes

VA

Break Amperes

120

60

7200

6

720

10

10

01

240

30

7200

3

720

10

10

.06 .04

480

15

7200

1.5

720

10

10

600

12

7200

1.2

720

10

10

06 04 02

VA

Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.

DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600

.02

Inductive and resistive .01 1

Cabling

2

4 6 10 20 40 60 current in amperes

Volts

Make and break

Continuous

125

0.55

2.5

250

0.27

2.5

600

0.10

2.5

XB2B, XD2P: Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm2 (20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or by quick connector conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).

38 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Non-Illuminated Operators Operator Type

Color

Flush head ZB2BA• Flush head

White

ZB2BA1

Black

ZB2BA2

Green

ZB2BA3

Red

ZB2BA4

Yellow

ZB2BA5

Blue

ZB2BA6

Grey

ZB2BA8

White “I”

Metallic flush head ZB2BA•9

Transparent flush head ZB2BA•8

Catalog Number

ZB2BA131

Black “START”

ZB2BA230

Black “O”

ZB2BA232

Green “I”

ZB2BA331

Red “O”

ZB2BA432

Flush head premarked

Green “START”

ZB2BA333

Green “ON”

ZB2BA341

Red “STOP”

ZB2BA434

Red “OFF”

ZB2BA435

Black

ZB2BA29

Metallic flush head (metal pusher)

Transparent flush head Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk) See page 57 Guarded head ZB2BA•6 Guarded head

Green

ZB2BA39

Red

ZB2BA49

Yellow

ZB2BA59

Green

ZB2BA38

Red

ZB2BA48

Amber

ZB2BA58

Blue

ZB2BA68

Clear

ZB2BA78

White

ZB2BA16

Black

ZB2BA26

Green

ZB2BA36

Red

ZB2BA46

Yellow

ZB2BA56

Blue

ZB2BA66

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6). Example: ZB2BA2 becomes ZB2BA27.

Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46 Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53 Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59

39 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Non-Illuminated Operators Operator Type

Color

Extended head Extended head ZB2BL•

White

ZB2BL1

Black

ZB2BL2

Green

ZB2BL3

Red

ZB2BL4

Yellow

ZB2BL5

Blue

ZB2BL6

Red “O” Extended head premarked

Silicon booted head

Neoprene booted head Silicon booted head ZB2BP•

Flush with reinforced dust, damp, and cutting oil protection Flush with reinforced protection ZB2BA•5 Transparent silicon booted push button Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk) See page 57.

ZB2BL432

Red “STOP”

ZB2BL434

Red “OFF”

ZB2BL435

Black Extended head marked stop ZB2BL434

Catalog Number

ZB2BP2

Green

ZB2BP3

Red

ZB2BP4

Yellow

ZB2BP5

Blue

ZB2BP6

Black

ZB2BP02

Green

ZB2BP03

Red

ZB2BP04

Yellow

ZB2BP05

Blue

ZB2BP06

White

ZB2BA15

Black

ZB2BA25

Green

ZB2BA35

Red

ZB2BA45

Yellow

ZB2BA55

Blue

ZB2BA65

Green

ZB2BP38

Red

ZB2BP48

Yellow

ZB2BP58

Blue

ZB2BP68

Clear

ZB2BP78

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6 and ZB2BP02 TO ZB2BP06). Example: ZB2BL2 becomes ZB2BL27.

Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 46 Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 38 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 57 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 55 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 56 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59

40 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates Operator Type

Size

Mushroom head 40mm ZB2BC• 30mm

Mushroom head Momentary

40mm

Mushroom head 60mm ZB2BR•

60mm

Mushroom head key release ZB2BS•4

Mushroom head turn to release ZB2BS54

G ER EN

CY

EM

Mushroom head with trigger action turn to release ZB2BS844

S TOP ZB2BY8330

Color

Catalog Number

Black

ZB2BC24

Green

ZB2BC34

Red

ZB2BC44

Yellow

ZB2BC54

Blue

ZB2BC64

Black

ZB2BC2

Green

ZB2BC3

Red

ZB2BC4

Yellow

ZB2BC5

Blue

ZB2BC6

Black

ZB2BR2

Green

ZB2BR3

Red

ZB2BR4

Yellow

ZB2BR5

Blue

ZB2BR6

40mm

Red

ZB2BS14

60mm

Red

ZB2BS24

Mushroom head push button with trigger actionf Key releasea

40mm

Red

ZB2BS944

Mushroom head turn to release

40mm

Red

ZB2BS54

Premarked “EMO”

40mm

Red

ZB2BS5430

Mushroom head push button with trigger actionf Turn to release

40mm

Red

ZB2BS844

Mushroom head turn to release

60mm

Red

ZB2BS64

Mushroom head push-pull

40mm

Premarked “EMERGENCY STOP”

40mm

Mushroom head Key releasea

Mushroom head push-pull

60mm

Black

ZB2BT2

Red

ZB2BT4

Red

ZB2BT43

Black

ZB2BX2

Red

ZB2BX4

a Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 56. For other key numbers contact local field office. f Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.

Guards / Locks Type

Size

Color

Metal

40 mm with finger cutout and 7 mm holes for padlocking

Red

Plastic

60 mm (for 40 mm turn to release)

Yellow

Catalog Number ZB2BZ1804 ZB2BZ1905

Yellow Contrast Plates PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter Text Blank Emergency Stop Arret d’Urgence Not Aus Parada de Emergencia Arresto Emergenza

Language Catalog Number N/A English French German Spanish Italian

ZB2BY9101 ZB2BY9330 ZB2BY9130 ZB2BY9230 ZB2BY9430 ZB2BY9630

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter Text

Language

Catalog Number

Blank Emergency Stop Arret d’Urgence Not Aus Parada de Emergencia Arresto Emergenza

N/A English French German Spanish Italian

ZB2BY8101 ZB2BY8330 ZB2BY8130 ZB2BY8230 ZB2BY8430 ZB2BY8630

Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46 Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59

41 4/98 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Lever and Key Operators Lever Operators Type

Number of positions, actions

Lever Color

Catalog Number

Black White Red Black White Red Black White Red Black White Red Black White Red Black White Red

ZB2BD2 ZB2BD201 ZB2BD204 ZB2BD4 ZB2BD401 ZB2BD404 ZB2BD3 ZB2BD301 ZB2BD304 ZB2BD5 ZB2BD501 ZB2BD504 ZB2BD8 ZB2BD801 ZB2BD804 ZB2BD7 ZB2BD701 ZB2BD704

2-maintained Standard lever ZB2BD•••

2-spring return from right to left

3-maintained Standard or Extended lever a

3-spring return to center from left and right

Extended lever a ZB2BJ•••

3-spring return from right to center 3-spring return from left to center

Key Operators Type

Number of positions, actions, key removal

Key switch f

Key switch ZB2BG••

Catalog Number

2-maintained key removal from left 2-maintained key removal from left or right 2-spring return from right to left, key removal from left 3-maintained key removal from center 3-maintained key removal from left and right 3-maintained key removal from left 3-maintained key removal from all positions 3-spring return left or right to center, key removal from center 3-spring return left to center key removal right 3-spring return right to center key removal center 3-spring return right to center key removal left

ZB2BG2 ZB2BG4 ZB2BG6 ZB2BG3 ZB2BG5 ZB2BG9 ZB2BG0 ZB2BG7 ZB2BG1 ZB2BG8 ZB2BG08

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 46) 2 Position selector switch

3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide O X O

Contact block guide

X O X

1 N.O. (left or right) 1 N.C. (left or right) 1 N.O. and X O 1 N.C. Note: View from front of panel

X O O X O X

O X O X X O

O O X O X X

1 N.O. (left) 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side) 1 N.O. (right) 1 N.C. (right) 1 N.C. (left) 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BD3 becomes ZB2BD37. a When ordering extended lever subsitute J for D. Example: ZB2BD2 becomes ZB2BJ2. f Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quanitity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 21. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers contact local field office.

Key Number

Suffix

421 458A 520 3131A

12 10 14 20

Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46 Specialty Contacts................................................................................ Page 53 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59

42 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Two Button Operators Momentary operators Type

Two flush ZB2BA9•••

Marked f

Black/Red

ZB2BA9124

Green/Red

ZB2BA9134

I,O

Black/Red

ZB2BA9224

I,O

Green/Red

ZB2BA9234

STOP, START

Black/Red

ZB2BA9724

STOP, START

Green/Red

ZB2BA9734

Black/Red

ZB2BL9324

Two flush

Green/Red

ZB2BL9334

I,O

Black/Red

ZB2BL9424

I,O

Green/Red

ZB2BL9434

STOP, START

Black/Red

ZB2BL9824

STOP, START

Green/Red

ZB2BL9834

One flush, one extended

One flush, one extended ZB2BL94••

f

Catalog Number

Color

Additional markings available on special order. Contact local field office for details.

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BA9124 becomes ZB2BA91247.

2 Button maintained operators Type

Start/stop ZB2BL98••

Number of contact(s)

Button 1

Button 2

Catalog Number

1

NO-Black

Black

XB2BF521

1

NO-Black

Red

XB2BF551

1

NO-Green

Red

XB2BF581

2

NO-Black

NO-Black

XB2BF523

2

NO-Black

NO-Red

XB2BF553

2

NO-Green

NO-Red

XB2BF583

2

NO-Black

NO-Black

XB2BF525

2

NO-Black

NC-Red

XB2BF555

2

NO-Green

NC-Red

XB2BF585

Flush interlocked push buttons (30 mm centers, maintained, mechanically interlocked) Units include contact block(s) as shown.

Type Replacement push button operators only (with no spring return in head) for XB2BF Interlocked XB2BF5••

Color

Catalog Number

Black

ZB2BAW80424194002

Green

ZB2BAW80424194003

Red

ZB2BAW80424194004

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BF521 becomes ZB2BF5217.

Contact Block Assemblies ............................................................... Page 46 Specialty Contacts.......................................................................... Page 53 Application Information .................................................................... Page 38 Legend Plates.................................................................................. Page 57 Accessories ..................................................................................... Page 55 Replacement Parts .......................................................................... Page 56 Dimensions............................................................................... Pages 58-59

43 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Specialty Operators Operators Type

Wobble sticks

Catalog Number

Color

Wobble sticks Potentiometer operator f

Black

ZB2BB2

Red

ZB2BB4

Black

ZB2BD922

2-maintained Joysticks t Contacts supplied

Potentiometer operator f

XD2PA22

4-maintained

XD2PA14

4-spring return

XD2PA24

Units come with 1 N.O. contact in each direction. Screw terminals. Contact blocks cannot be added or removed from the above arrangements. For other requirements, contact local sales office. Customer to supply potentiometer, unit accepts 1/4" diameter, 1.625" (43-47 mm) length shaft potentiometer.

4 Position

2 Position

OPERATED

X

OPERATED

X

CENTER

CENTER

CENTER OPERATED

Joysticks

CENTER

X CENTER

OPERATED

X

OPERATED

t

XD2PA12

2-spring return

CENTER

X

OPERATED

X

These 2 direction and 4 direction position charts are viewed from behind the panel, thereby reversing east and west positions. When lever is moved away from center, only one contact changes from N.O. to N.C. The other contact blocks in the swtich are unaffected.

Two step push buttons (contacts supplied) Type

Flush head

k

Contact 1st step

Contact 2nd step

Catalog Number

N.O.

N.O.

XB2BAk41

N.O.

N.C.

XB2BAk42

N.O.+N.C.

N.O.

XB2BAk43

N.O.+N.C.

N.O.+N.C.

XB2BAk44

Replace k with desired color head. (1-white, 2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).

Two position toggle switch (maintained) Type Two position toggle switch NEMA Type 1 only

Color

Catalog Number

Black

ZB2BD28

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BD922 becomes ZB2BD9227.

Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46 Specialty Contacts ................................................................................ Page 53 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59

44 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Reset Operators Reset operators Type

Adjustable length of rod

Description

XB2BA8kk 0.39" (10 mm) Travel Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.12" (1-3 mm) Tightened by nut

0.55" (14 mm) Travel Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm) Tightened by 2 screw mounting base (supplied)

0.24" - 0.63" (6 - 16 mm)

0.63" - 1.02" (16 - 26 mm)

1.18" - 2.25" (30 - 57 mm)

2.16" - 3.23" (55 - 82 mm)

XB2BA9kk 30 to 82 mm 3.15" - 4.2" (80 - 107 mm)

4.13" - 5.2" (105 - 132 mm)

Flush head

5.12"- 6.18" (130 - 157 mm) 0.55" (14 mm) Travel 6.1" - 7.16" Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm) (155 - 182 mm) Tightened by 2 screw mounting base (supplied) 7.08" - 8.15" (180 - 207 mm) XB2BA9kk 80 to 257 mm

8.07" - 9.13" (205 - 232 mm)

9.05" - 10.1" (230 - 257 mm)

Color

Catalog Number

Black

XB2BA821

Red

XB2BA841

Blue

XB2BA861

Black

XB2BA822

Red

XB2BA842

Blue

XB2BA862

Black

XB2BA921

Red

XB2BA941

Blue

XB2BA961

Black

XB2BA922

Red

XB2BA942

Blue

XB2BA962

Black

XB2BA923

Red

XB2BA943

Blue

XB2BA963

Black

XB2BA924

Red

XB2BA944

Blue

XB2BA964

Black

XB2BA925

Red

XB2BA945

Blue

XB2BA965

Black

XB2BA926

Red

XB2BA946

Blue

XB2BA966

Black

XB2BA927

Red

XB2BA947

Blue

XB2BA967

Black

XB2BA928

Red

XB2BA948

Blue

XB2BA968

Black

XB2BA929

Red

XB2BA949

Blue

XB2BA969

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BA944 becomes ZB2BA9447.

Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38 Legend Plates ....................................................................................... Page 57 Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59

45 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Contact Blocks Mounting base with contact block(s) “Screw clamp connection” N.O. Contacts N.O. N.C.

Type

ZB2BZ101

N.C.

1 Contact Block

2 Contact Blocks

Catalog Number

1

-

-

1

ZB2BZ101 ZB2BZ102

2

-

ZB2BZ103

-

2

ZB2BZ104

1

1

ZB2BZ105

Additional contact blocks Contacts N.O. N.C.

Type

ZB2BE10 k

For making up body assemblies with 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocks or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf

1

-

-

1

Catalog Number ZB2BE101 ■

ZB2BE102

Mounting base with contact block(s) “Quick connect” t Contacts N.O. N.C.

Type 1 Contact Block

2 Contact Blocks

Catalog Number

1

-

ZB2BZ1013

-

1

ZB2BZ1023

2

-

ZB2BZ1033

-

2

ZB2BZ1043

1

1

ZB2BZ1053

Additional contact blocks “Quick Connect” * Contacts N.O. N.C.

Type For making up body assemblies with 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocks or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf

1

-

-

1

Catalog Number ZB2BE1013 ■

ZB2BE1023

Spare parts Description

ZB2BZ009

Catalog Number

Mounting Base only

With fixing screws

ZB2BZ009

Quick Connect t

Fitting by customer

ZB2BZ003

t Quick connect contact blocks will accept commercially available female quick slide connector (1 x 0.25" or 2 x 0.11") f Non-illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contacts maximum (3 decks of 2). ■ N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.

Non-Illuminated Operators .............................................................Pages 39-41 Specialty Contacts ............................................................................... Page 53 Application Information..........................................................................Page 38 Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59

46 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Pilot Lights and Light Modules Pilot light heads Type

Standard ZB2BV••

Special lens for neon and LED bulbs ZB2BV0••

Standard

Special lens for neon and LED bulbs

Glass lens (NEMA Type 1 only)

Color

Catalog Number

White

ZB2BV01

Green

ZB2BV03

Red

ZB2BV04

Amber

ZB2BV05

Blue

ZB2BV06

Clear

ZB2BV07

Green

ZB2BV033

Red

ZB2BV043

Amber

ZB2BV053

Blue

ZB2BV063

Clear

ZB2BV073

Green

ZB2BV032

Red

ZB2BV042

Amber

ZB2BV052

Clear

ZB2BV072

Pilot light modules f

Direct supply ZB2BV6

Type

Catalog Number

Direct supply (incandescent bulb included)t (AC/DC)

ZB2BV6t

Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V bulb included) (AC only) 24 V: 50-60 Hz

ZB2BV1

48 V: 50-60 Hz 110 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV2 110-120 V: 60 Hz

ZB2BV3

127 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV91

220 V: 50 Hz Transformer type ZB2BV3

240 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV4 220-240 V: 60 Hz

ZB2BV94

380 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV5

415 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV9

440-480 V: 60 Hz

ZB2BV95

500 V: 50 Hz

ZB2BV8

550-660 V: 60 Hz

ZB2BV98

Resistor type (130 V bulb included). 220/250 V (AC/DC) t f

ZB2BV7

Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage. Light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BV6 becomes ZB2BV63.

Replacement Bulbs................................................................................Page 56 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59

47 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Illuminated Operators Operator Type

Color

Flush head

Flush Head ZB2BW3•

Flush head for neon and LED lamps

Flush Head for LED ZB2BW3•• Extended head

Extended Head ZB2BW1•

Extended head for neon and LED lamps

Extended Head for LED ZB2BW1•• Silicon booted flush head Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk ) See page 57 Silicon Booted Flush Head ZB2BW5•

Push to test

Catalog Number

White

ZB2BW31

Green

ZB2BW33

Red

ZB2BW34

Amber

ZB2BW35

Blue

ZB2BW36

Clear

ZB2BW37

Green

ZB2BW333

Red

ZB2BW343

Amber

ZB2BW353

Blue

ZB2BW363

Clear

ZB2BW373

White

ZB2BW11

Green

ZB2BW13

Red

ZB2BW14

Amber

ZB2BW15

Blue

ZB2BW16

Clear

ZB2BW17

Green

ZB2BW133

Red

ZB2BW143

Amber

ZB2BW153

Blue

ZB2BW163

Clear

ZB2BW173

Green

ZB2BW53

Red

ZB2BW54

Amber

ZB2BW55

Blue

ZB2BW56

Clear

ZB2BW57

Green

ZB2BV031

Red

ZB2BV041

Amber

ZB2BV051

Blue

ZB2BV061

Clear

ZB2BV071

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BV071 becomes ZB2BV0717.

Light Module Assemblies .......................................................................Page 52 Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59

48 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Illuminated Operators Mushroom operator Type

Color

40 mm Mushroon head 2 position momentary

40 mm Mushroom head ZB2BW•• 40 mm Mushroom head 2 position maintained

Two button with amber indicatort

Green

ZB2BW43

Red

ZB2BW44

Amber

ZB2BW45

Blue

ZB2BW46

Clear

ZB2BW47

Green

ZB2BW63

Red

ZB2BW64

Amber

ZB2BW65

Blue

ZB2BW66

Clear

ZB2BW67

Color

Catalog Number

NEMA Type 1 only f

Type

Marked

Two Flush

Two Flush Amber Indicator ZB2BW8••54

Black/Red

ZB2BW81254

Green/Red

ZB2BW81354

I,O

Black/Red

ZB2BW82254

I,O

Green/Red

ZB2BW82354

START,STOP

Black/Red

ZB2BW87254

START,STOP

Green/Red

ZB2BW87354

One flush, one extended

t f

Catalog Number

Black/Red

ZB2BW83254

Green/Red

ZB2BW83354

I,O

Black/Red

ZB2BW84254

I,O

Green/Red

ZB2BW84354

START,STOP

Black/Red

ZB2BW88254

START,STOP

Green/Red

ZB2BW88354

Additional color indicators available, contact local field office for details. To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4, 13 order clear silicon boot ZB2BW008.

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BW64 becomes ZB2BW647.

Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52 Specialty Light Modules ........................................................................Page 54 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56 Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59

49 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Illuminated Operators Selector Switches Number of positions, action

Catalog Number

Color

2-maintained

Selector switch ZB2BK1kk

Green

ZB2BK123

Red

ZB2BK124

Amber

ZB2BK125

Blue

ZB2BK126

Clear

ZB2BK127

2-spring return

Green

ZB2BK143

from right to left

Red

ZB2BK144

3-maintained

3-spring return to center from right and left

3-spring return from right to center

3-spring return from left to center

Amber

ZB2BK145

Blue

ZB2BK146

Clear

ZB2BK147

Green

ZB2BK133

Red

ZB2BK134

Amber

ZB2BK135

Blue

ZB2BK136

Clear

ZB2BK137

Green

ZB2BK153

Red

ZB2BK154

Amber

ZB2BK155

Blue

ZB2BK156

Clear

ZB2BK157

Green

ZB2BK183

Red

ZB2BK184

Amber

ZB2BK185

Blue

ZB2BK186

Clear

ZB2BK187

Green

ZB2BK173

Red

ZB2BK174

Amber

ZB2BK175

Blue

ZB2BK176

Clear

ZB2BK177

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 52) 2 Position selector switch

3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide O X O

Contact block guide

X O X

1 N.O. (left or right) 1 N.C. (left or right) 1 N.O. and X O 1 N.C. Note: View from front of panel

X O O X O X

O X O X X O

O O X O X X

1 N.O. (left) 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side) 1 N.O. (right) 1 N.C. (right) 1 N.C. (left) 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)

Operating heads with black metal bezel To order, add suffix 7 to the above references. Example: ZB2BK123 becomes ZB2BK1237.

Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52 Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54 Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38 Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57 Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55 Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59

50 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Illuminated Operators 40 mm Mushroom head Push positiont

Type

Non-Illuminated XB2BN•••

Illuminated (Direct Supply) XB2BN••6•

Illuminated (Transformer type) XB2BN••••

Color

Catalog Number 1N.O. - 1N.C.♦

Catalog Number 2N.O. - 2N.C.

M M M M M M SR SR SR SR SR M M M M M M SR SR SR SR SR SR M M M M M M SR SR SR SR SR SR M M M M M M SR SR SR SR SR SR

White XB2BN111 XB2BN112 Green XB2BN311 XB2BN312 Red XB2BN411 XB2BN412 Amber XB2BN511 XB2BN512 Non-illuminated Blue XB2BN611 XB2BN612 M: Maintained Clear XB2BN711 XB2BN712 SR: Spring Return White XB2BN121 XB2BN322 Red XB2BN421 XB2BN422 Amber XB2BN521 XB2BN522 Blue XB2BN621 XB2BN622 Clear XB2BN721 XB2BN722 White XB2BN1161 XB2BN1162 Green XB2BN3161 XB2BN3162 Red XB2BN4161 XB2BN4162 Amber XB2BN5161 XB2BN5162 Blue XB2BN6161 XB2BN6162 Illuminated Clear XB2BN7161 XB2BN7162 Direct supply White XB2BN1261 XB2BN1262 Green XB2BN3261 XB2BN3262 Red XB2BN4261 XB2BN4262 Amber XB2BN5261 XB2BN5262 Blue XB2BN6261 XB2BN6262 Clear XB2BN7261 XB2BN7262 White XB2BN1131 XB2BN1132 Green XB2BN3131 XB2BN3132 Red XB2BN4131 XB2BN4132 Amber XB2BN5131 XB2BN5132 Blue XB2BN6131 XB2BN6132 Illuminated Clear XB2BN7131 XB2BN7132 Transformer Type White XB2BN1231 XB2BN1232 110/120 V Green XB2BN3231 XB2BN3232 Red XB2BN4231 XB2BN4232 Amber XB2BN5231 XB2BN5232 Blue XB2BN6231 XB2BN6232 Clear XB2BN7231 XB2BN7232 White XB2BN1141 XB2BN1142 Green XB2BN3141 XB2BN3142 Red XB2BN4141 XB2BN4142 Amber XB2BN5141 XB2BN5142 Blue XB2BN6141 XB2BN6142 Illuminated Clear XB2BN7141 XB2BN7142 Transformer Type White XB2BN1241 XB2BN1242 220/240V Green XB2BN3241 XB2BN3242 Red XB2BN4241 XB2BN4242 Amber XB2BN5241 XB2BN5242 Blue XB2BN6241 XB2BN6242 Clear XB2BN7241 XB2BN7242 White W40429264001 Green W40429264003 Red W40429264004 Mushroom lens only Amber W40429264005 Blue W40429264006 Clear W40429264007 t Position status: Position 1 - Pull. Spring return, Position 2- Center, Maintained, Position 3 - Push. Maintained or spring return. f Contacts cannot be modified or interchanged; therefore operators are not sold separately.

1 N.O./1 N.C. Pos. 1 Pull

Pos. 2 Center

2 N.O./2 N.C. Pos. 3 Push

Pos. 1 Pull

Pos. 2 Center

Pos. 3 Push

Application Information...........................................Page 38 Legend Plates ........................................................Page 57 Accessories ............................................................Page 55 Replacement Parts.................................................Page 56 Dimensions......................................................Pages 58-59

51 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Light Module Assemblies Light module assemblies with contact block(s) screw clamp connectorsk

N.O.

Type

N.C.

N.O.

Contacts N.C.

Catalog Number

Direct supply (incandescent bulb included) (AC/DC) Without contactsf

-

-

1 Contact block

1

-

ZB2BW061+

-

1

ZB2BW062+

2 Contact blocks Direct supply ZB2BW06 k

ZB2BW063+

2

ZB2BW064+

1

1

ZB2BW065+

ZB2BW0t0

Without contactsf

-

-

1

-

ZB2BW0t1

-

1

ZB2BW0t2

2

-

ZB2BW0t3

-

2

ZB2BW0t4

1

1

ZB2BW0t5

1

ZB2BW075

Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply 1

Additional contact blocks f

N.O.

■

N.C. Contacts N.O. N.C.

Type For making up body assemblies with 3 or maximum 4 contact blocks or replacing 1st or 2nd contact block Additional contact block ZB2BE10 k

-

-

1 Contact block

2 Contact blocks

Resistor type ZB2BW075

2

Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V AC incandescent bulb included) (AC only)j

2 Contact blocks

Transformer type ZB2BW03k

ZB2BW060+

1

-

-

1

Catalog Number ZB2BE101 ■

ZB2BE102

+

Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V AC/DC. Note: If desired without bulb, omit voltage. t Select proper digit for voltage desired: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2(48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz). 94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz). f Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contacts maximum (2 decks of 2). j Additional primary voltages available, contact local field office for details. k Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BW061 becomes ZB2BW0613. ■ N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.

Illuminated Operators .................................................................... Pages 48-50 Specialty Light Modules........................................................................ Page 54 Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38 Legend Plates....................................................................................... Page 57 Accessories .......................................................................................... Page 55 Replacement Parts ............................................................................... Page 56 Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59

52 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Specialty Contact Blocks

Specialty contact blocks Type

N.O. Description

Low voltage / low current Gold flashed contacts 5-24 volt 0.1-100 mA

Contact block without mounting base

N.C. Number of contacts

Catalog Number

1-N.O.

ZB2BE1016

1-N.C.

ZB2BE1026

1-N.O.

ZB2BZ1016

1-N.C.

ZB2BZ1026

1-N.O. Contact block w/o mounting base

Early closing Late opening

Overlapping block w/mounting base Overlapping, sequencing & time delay contact blocks Sequencing block w/mounting base

ZB2BE202

1-NO (early closing) & 1-NC (late opening)

ZB2BZ106

1-NO(early closing) & 1-N.O.

0.1-30 sec. time delay block w/mounting base

1-N.O. &

10-180 sec. time delay block w/mounting base

1-N.O. &

Contact blocks for ring tongue lugs with widths smaller than 0.312” (8 mm)

ZB2BE201

1-N.C.

1-N.C. 1-N.C.

ZB2BZ107 ZB2BZ91 ZB2BZ92

1-N.O.

ZB2BE1019

1-N.C.

ZB2BE1029

Application Information......................................................................... Page 38 Accessories.......................................................................................... Page 55 Replacement Parts .............................................................................. Page 56 Dimensions ................................................................................... Pages 58-59

53 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XB2B 22 mm Specialty Light Modules Specialty Light Modules Type

Supply Voltage

Catalog Number

Flashing pilot light base

Light Module with incandescent bulb included

Description

120 Vac

ZB2BV184

Flashing illuminated push button base

Light Module with incandescent bulb and 1 N.O./1 N.C. included

120 Vac

ZB2BW1845

Typical Wiring Diagrams Flashing pilot light base ZB2BV184

Off

Flashing

On

Wiring in parallel

X1 Y1

X1 Y1

X1 Y1

X1 Y1

X1 Y1

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X2 Y2

X2 Y2

X2 Y2

X2 Y2

X2 Y2

-X1,+X2

Type Remote test pilot light base

Description

Supply Voltage

Catalog Number

Single Diode

= 105 ohms/cm)

1. Production Areas

Res. 0.25A 8 VA

32/30 120/100

B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen

G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm) 2. Potential Hazard A. May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.

Max. Volts AC/DC

A. Acetylene

Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR station Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote◆ Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote◆ Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR station Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote◆ Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote▲ Intrinsically Safe System✻ 9001 BR Station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote▲ Intrinsically Safe System✻

KA55

Volts 120 240 Volts 115

Make Amps 10.00 5.00

VA 1200 1200

Make Amps 0.50

VA 58

AC NEMA Type C300① Break Amps VA 1.000 120 0.500 120 DC NEMA Type Q150 Break Amps VA 0.50 58

Continuous Carrying Amps 3.0 3.0 Continuous Carrying Amps 3.0

The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA. ① Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor. ➁ Inductive and Resistive Ratings

✻ An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an intrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous area to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any nonilluminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used. ◆ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. 1.Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used. 2.All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. ■ 3.Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules other than the transformer type. ■ 4.The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures. ▲ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators. For ◆ and ▲: UL Listed: File E10054N, CCN NOIV. For ■: Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.

121 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type KX “H” Numbers Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.) H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 H18 H19 H21 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 H29 H31 H32 H33 H34 H36 H37 H38 H39 H40 H41 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 H47 H48 H50 H51 H52 H53 H54 H55 H56 H57 H58 H59 H60 H61 H62 H63 H64 H66 H71 H72 H73 H74 H75 H76 H77 H78 H79 H80 H81 H82 H83 H86 H87 H89 H90 H91 H92 H93 H94 H95 H97 H98 H99 H100 H101 H102 H103 H104 H105 H106 H107 H109 H110 H111 H112 H113 H114

Positions 1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA3 KA4 KA4 KA1 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA5 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA5 KA3 KA3 KA5 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA5 KA1 KA5 KA5 KA3 KA4 KA4 KA1 KA2 KA5 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA4 KA1 KA12 KA35 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA31 KA31 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA4 KA33 KA1 KA21

2

3

4

KA1 KA1 KA1

KA1 KA1

KA1

KA2

KA1 KA3

KA2 KA3 KA1 KA5 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA4 KA2 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA1 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA5 KA2 KA2 KA4 KA5 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA1 KA3 KA5 KA1 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA2 KA3 KA4 KA1 KA12 KA33 KA2 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA1 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA31 KA2 KA3 KA3 KA4 KA33 KA1

5

6

The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allows them to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem. The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an operator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to be specified by a single type number. Operators and contact blocks will be shipped completely assembled. EXAMPLE: A Type KXRCGR push button with 2 Type KA1 contact blocks would be Class 9001 Type KXRCGRH2.

KA2 KA3 KA2 KA3 KA1

KA1

KA3 KA1

KA1

KA1

KA1

KA1

For Type KX

KA4 KA3 KA1

KA5

KA1

KA3

KA1 KA1 KA3

KA3

KA2 KA2 KA3 KA3 KA4 KA3 KA3

KA2 KA3 KA4 KA2 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA2 KA5 KA4

KA3

KA3

KA3 KA4

KA2 KA1 KA1 KA5 KA3 KA3 KA2 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA5 KA3 KA2 KA1 KA5 KA2 KA13 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA1

KA5

KA2 KA3 KA2 KA2 KA5 KA3

KA3 KA1 KA5 KA2 KA3 KA4

KA3 KA5

KA5

KA3

KA3 KA2

KA5 KA5 KA5 KA3 KA13

KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA3 KA3 KA2

KA1 KA2 KA1 KA2

KA1

KA1 KA3 KA5 KA3 KA2

KA3 KA3 KA3 KA5 KA3

1

2

3

4

5

H115 H116 H117 H118 H119 H120 H121 H122

KA3 KA3 KA2 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA3 KA1

KA1 KA1 KA3 KA5 KA1 KA4 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA5

KA5 KA3 KA1

KA3 KA2 KA2

KA2

KA5 KA3 KA3

KA3

H124 H125 H126 H127 H128 H129 H130 H131 H132 H133 H134 H135 H136 H137 H138 H139 H140 H141 H142 H143 H144 H145 H146 H147 H148 H152 H153 H154 H155 H156 H157 H158 H159

KA2 KA2 KA2

KA3 KA3 KA2

KA2 KA2

KA2

KA2

KA2

KA3

KA3

Positions

Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)

H161 H162 H163 H164 H165 H166 H167 H168 H170 H171 H172 H173 H174 H175 H176 H177 H178 H179

KA5 KA42 KA43 KA41 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA3 KA45 KA3 KA5 KA44 KA43 KA1 KA3 KA51 KA53 KA53 KA51 KA1 KA53 KA4 KA42 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA52 KA2 K85 K85 KA55 KA22 KA54 KA53 KA23 KA54 KA1 KA6 KA4 KA3 K85 KA53

6

KA5 KA5 KA3

KA3

KA2 KA2

KA3 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA45 KA3 KA5 KA43 KA1 KA1 K85

KA3 KA3 KA2 KA2 KA2 KA5 KA44

KA2 KA3 KA2 KA2 KA44 KA2

KA41 KA5 KA4

KA52 KA51 KA2 KA52 KA5 KA43 KA1

KA2 KA53

KA2 KA1

KA2 KA1 KA1 KA3 KA3

K85

KA5 KA4 KA4

KA22 KA23 KA22 KA51 KA51 KA23 KA51 KA3 KA2

KA1

KA2 KA2

KA2

KA3 KA2

KA4

KA51

KA1 KA5

KA3 KA5

KA4 KA3 KA55

“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.

122 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm Application Data, Materials

The Type KX operators are UL and CSA Listed as follows:

Type KX Operator Materials Single Push Button

File CCN

E42259 NKCR

File Class

25490C 3211 03

Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.

The KX operators are rated UL Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12, 13/ NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4X, 6, 12, 13 without the use of protective boots. Boots are recommended for dirty environments or areas that are hosed down with water under very high pressure.

(KXRA, KXRB, KXRN, KXRP, KXTA) Gasket – Nitrile Locking Head – ZAMAC #3 Screws – Steel Terminals – Steel Button – Polycarbonate Seal – Nitrile Seal Retainer – Steel Bezel – Zinc Stem – Polycarbonate Stem Cover – Polycarbonate Legend Insert – Polyester Return-Spring – Music Wire Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum Adaptor – Zinc Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire Liner – Nylon

Maximum Number of Contact Blocks Per Operator Mom. Push Button — Three mounted in tandem for a total of six.

Maint. Push Button — Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.

Selector Switch — Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.

Operator Service Temperature Range: -22 °F to +140 °F at 50% relative humidity -30 °C to +60 °C Mounting Hole For Type KX Control Units

Dual Push Button (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated) (KXRC, KXRD, KXRE, KXRF, KXRG, KXRH, KXRJ, KXRK, KXRL, KXRM, KXTC) Gasket – Nitrile Seal – Nitrile Seal Retainer – Brass Bezel – Zinc Button Stem – Stainless Steel Button – Polycarbonate Button Cover – Polycarbonate Legend Insert – Polyester Lamp Cover – Polycarbonate Lens Retainer – Polycarbonate Lens – Polycarbonate Return-Spring – Music Wire Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum Adaptor – Zinc Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire Liner – Nylon Retainer Ring – Steel Interlock Pad – Polyester Interlock – Sintered Steel Interlock – Nylon (KXRD) Pin – Steel (KXRE, KXRF) Detent Bearing – Steel (KXRE, KXRF) Detent Spring – Music Wire (KXRE, KXRF) Interlock – Steel (KXRM) Baffle – Steel Locking Head – ZAMAC #3 Screws – Steel Stem – Polycarbonate Stem Cover – Polycarbonate Terminals – Steel

Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch. Selector Switch

Selector Switch Angular Travel

(Non-Illuminated and Illuminated) (KXS) Gasket – Nitrile Seal – Nitrile Seal Retainer – Steel Return Spring – Music Wire Cam Rotor – Celenex 3300 Cam Follower – Delrin 100 Cam Carrier – Trogamid Cam Profile – Delrin 100 Bearing – Polyester Bezel – Zinc Knob – Polycarbonate or Nylon Knob Ring Nut – Polycarbonate Knob Seal – Nitrile Legend Plate – ABS Plug Insert – Polyester Key Plug – Zinc, Brass, Music Wire Key – Brass Locking Head – Zinc Locking Head Seal – Nitrile Insert – Zinc Adaptor – Zinc Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire Liner – Nylon Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum Terminals – Steel Screws – Steel

Contact Block Type (KA) Housing– Amorphous Nylon Contact Slider– Nylon or Acetal Terminal– Steel Saddle Clamp– Steel Spring– Steel Contacts– Silver and Copper Blade– Beryllium Copper Label– Paper Shrouds– Delrin 507 Lockout– 410 Stainless Steel Closing Plate– ZAMAC #3 Boots– Neoprene Potentiometer (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD): Pot – Clarostat Types J and EJ Operator – ZAMAC #3 Legend Plate – ABS Knob – Polycarbonate Printed circuit board – Phenolic Cam Rotor – Polyester Cam – Acetal Cam Carrier – Nylon Adaptor – ZAMAC #3 Adaptor Spring – Square Music Wire Spacer – Fiber Board Gasket – Buna N Terminal – Brass Screws – Steel Bezel – Zinc Locking Head – ZAMAC #3 Legend Inserts (KXN100, KXN200, KXN300, KXN400, KXN500) – .005 Thk. Matte Polyester Legend Plates (KXN-600, KXN-700) – ABS

Pilot Light (KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTE) O-Ring – Nitrile Bezel – Zinc Button – Polycarbonate Button Cover – Polycarbonate Button Stem – Polycarbonate Screws – Steel Terminals – Steel Lens Assembly – Polycarbonate Baffle – Steel Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum Adaptor – Zinc Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire

Light Module (Single Lamp KM) Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester Socket – Steel Terminal – Steel with Tin Plate Saddle Clamp – Steel Translating Pin – Polycarbonate Transformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride,Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper Lamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire

Light Module (2 Lamp KXAKM2) Adaptor Screw – Steel Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester Lamp Terminal – Copper Terminal – Steel Saddle Clamp – Steel Contact Spring – Copper Translating Pin – Polycarbonate Transformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper

Light Module (4 Lamp KXAKM4) Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester Lamp Terminal – Copper Adaptor Screw – Steel Terminal – Steel Saddle Clamp – Steel Transformer – Nylon, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper

123 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm Dimensions Approximate Dimensions – Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings. 2.82 72 1.07 27

1.47 37

KX RA KX RN

0.87 22 65075-125

2.82 72

1.85 47

1.28 32

1.47 37

KX SA KX SB KX SC KX SD

0.88 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

1.85 47

KX SE KX SF KX SG KX SH

0.88 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

65075-125

Single Push Button Operator Non-Illuminated

0.87 22 65075-125

1.07 27

Single Pilot Light

1.47 37

KX SR KX SS KX ST KX SV

0.88 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

KX SW KX SX KX SY KX SZ

panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

1.28 32

1.47 37

0.90 23

Dual Lamp Pilot Light

panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

3.10 79

1.47 37

side 2 side 1

KX SJ KX SK KX SL KX SM

2.00 51

65075-125

KX SN KX SO KX SP KX SQ

Single Push Button Operator Illuminated

0.64 16 65075-125

2.00 51

65075-125

Selector Switch Operator Illuminated

panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

1.47 37

0.85 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

65075-125

Key Operator Selector Switch

side 2 side 1

KX RB KX RP KX TA

0.87 22

0.88 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

65075-125

2.75 70

1.47 37

1.85 47

2.54 65

Dual Push Button Operator Non-Illuminated

1.47 37

2.00 51

65075-125

2.82 72

2.82 72

KX RC KX RD KX RE KX RF

0.64 16

Selector Switch Operator Non-Illuminated

1.85 47

1.47 37

panel thickness .06 Min. 2

1.47 37

1.47 37

Four Lamp Pilot Light

2.15 55

1.28 32

0.85 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

1.47 37

3.20 81

1.28 32

side 2 side 1

KX RG KX RH KX RJ KX RX

0.87 22

KX BA KX BB

2.00 51

65075-125

65075-125

Dual Push Button Operator Illuminated

1.47 37

0.87 22 65075-125

0.85 22 panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

Dual Lamp Push Button Operator

panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

Double Pot Potentiometer Operator

1.60 41 0.97 25

1.47 37

1.57 40

2.28 58

0.93 24 KX RL KX RM KX TC

0.85 22

65075-125

Single Pot Potentiometer Operator

4.69 119 2.75 70

KX BA KX BB

0.85 22

panel thickness .06 Min. .25 Max. 2 6

65075-183

Panel Thickness 0.06 Min. 0.25 Max. 2 6

SHROUD

Shroud

1.06 27 65075-183

Boot

1.08 27 65075-183

Lockout

Minimum Centerline Spacings For Type KX 21⁄4" Vertically 15⁄8" Horizontally

124 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type T 30 mm Push Buttons Class 9001

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page Type T Foundry Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Type T Foundry Duty Selector Switches and Selector Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Type T Foundry Duty Operators and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Legend Plates and Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 List of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Foundry Duty Operators

Non-Illuminated Push Button – Legend Plate Not Included Description

Color Insert

Type

Universal — Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

TR50

Black Red Green Blue

TR1 TR2 TR15 TR19

Half Guard

Full Guard

Extended Guard

No Guard

TR51

Without Guard

Black Red

TR6 TR7

With With Red Green Color Cap Color Cap

(Without Guard Shown)

Universal — Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

TR52

Black Red

TR35 TR36

Universal — Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

TR53

Black Red

TR13 TR14

13⁄8" Dia. Black 13⁄8" Dia. Red 21⁄4" Dia. Black 21⁄4" Dia. Red 13⁄8" Dia. Yellow 21⁄4" Dia. Green No Mushroom Head

TR3 TR4 TR10 TR11 TR22 TR25 TR59

With Guard With Red Color Cap

With Green Color Cap

Type

Type

Type

Type

Transformer

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 208-220 V, 50-60 Hz 380-480 V, 50-60 Hz 550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

TP35R3 TP37R3 TP39R3 TP40R3

TP35G3 TP37G3 TP39G3 TP40G3

TP41R3 TP43R3 TP45R3 TP46R3

TP41G3 TP43G3 TP45G3 TP46G3

Resistor

120 Vac or dc 240 Vac or dc

TP52R3 TP53R3

TP52G3 TP53G3

TP59R3 TP60R3

TP59G3 TP60G3

Full Voltage

6 Vac or dc 12 Vac or dc 18 Vac or dc 24-28 Vac or dc 60 Vac or dc

TP47R3 TP48R3 TP49R3 TP50R3 TP63R3

TP47G3 TP48G3 TP49G3 TP50G3 TP63G3

TP54R3 TP55R3 TP56R3 TP57R3 TP68R3

TP54G3 TP55G3 TP56G3 TP57G3 TP68G3

Type T illuminated operators and pilot lights use Type K light modules. For replacement lamps and VA ratings refer to listing on page 132.

Separate Color Caps

Pilot Lights – Legend Plate Not Included

Plastic Color Caps for Standard Pilot Lights Only

Glass Color Caps for Standard or Push To Test Pilot Lights

Plastic Color Caps for Illuminated Push Buttons

Color

Type

Type

Type

Red

R1

R2

R3

Green

G1

G2

G3

Amber

A1

A2

A3

Blue

B1

B2

B3

Clear

C1

C2

C3

White

W1

W2

W3

Yellow

.....

Y2

.....

Voltage and Frequency Standard Pilot Light

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 208-220 380-480 V, 50-60 Hz 550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Voltage and Frequency

Description

Universal — Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

Mushroom Button

Description

Illuminated Push Button – Contact Blocks (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) Included; Legend Plate Not Included

Push-To-Test Pilot Light

With Red Plastic Color Cap

With Green Plastic Color Cap

With Red Glass Color Cap

With Green Glass Color Cap

Type

Type

Type

Type

TP1R1 TP3R1 TP5R1 TP6R1

TP1G1 TP3G1 TP5G1 TP6G1

TP21R2 TP23R2 TP25R2 TP26R2

TP21G2 TP23G2 TP25G2 TP26G2

Neon

120 Vac or dc 240 Vac or dc 380 Vac or dc 480 Vac or dc 550 Vac or dc

TP7R1 TP8R1 TP9R1 TP10R1 TP11R1

...... ...... ...... ...... ......

...... ...... ...... ...... ......

...... ...... ...... ...... ......

Resistor

120 Vac or dc 240 Vac or dc

TP19R1 TP20R1

TP19G1 TP20G1

TP32R2 TP33R2

TP32G2 TP33G2

File CCN

E42259 NKCR

Full Voltage

6 Vac or dc 12 Vac or dc 18 Vac or dc 24-28 Vac or dc 60 Vac or dc 120 Vac or dc

TP12R1 TP13R1 TP14R1 TP15R1 TP18R1 TP19R1

TP12G1 TP13G1 TP14G1 TP15G1 TP18G1 TP19G1

TP27R2 TP28R2 TP29R2 TP30R2 TP64R2 TP32R2

TP27G2 TP28G2 TP29G2 TP30G2 TP64G2 TP32G2

File Class

LR 25490 3211 03

Marking

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 227.

Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130 126 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Foundry Duty Selector Switches

Selector Switch Operators – Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included 1 - Contact Closed

Contact Block Required

Description

3 Position Center

Quantity and Type

Center

4 Position

Center

Center

Center

Mount on Side Left Right

1-KA1

Left Right

Left Right

Left Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

#2

1 0

0 1

1 0

0 1

0 1

1 0

1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

#1

1 0

0 1

1 0

0 1

0 1

1 0

0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1-KA1 Selector Switch

0 - Contact Open

2 Position

A

E

D

B

C

D

E

F

H

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

Manual Return Standard Black Knob Key Operated

TS1 TS1K✽

...... ......

...... ......

TS2 TS2K✽

TS3 TS3K✽

TS4 TS4K ✽

TS5 TS5K ✽

TS6 TS6K✽

TS401

Spring Return - Left to Center Standard Black Knob Key Operated

...... ......

TS14 TS14K2✽

...... ......

TS15 TS15K✽

TS16 TS16K ✽

TS17 TS17K✽

TS18 TS18K ✽

TS19 TS19K✽

...... ......

Spring Return - Right to Center Standard Black Knob Key Operated

...... ......

...... ......

TS27 TS27K1✽

TS511 TS21K✽

TS521 TS22K ✽

TS531 TS23K ✽

TS541 TS24K ✽

TS551 TS25K✽

...... ......

Spring Return - Both Sides to Center Standard Black Knob Key Operated

...... ......

...... ......

...... ......

TS8 TS8K5

TS9 TS9K5

TS10 TS10K5

TS11 TS11K5

TS12 TS12K5

...... ......

CAM

✽ Key Withdrawal Code: See table below for proper code number. All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number NQ1101 key. For replacement key, order 9001NQ1101. No other keys are available.

Key Withdrawal Arrangement For Selector Switches Positions marked “YES” are those in which the key can be withdrawn, locking the switch in that position. 2-Position Switches

3-Position Switches

No.

No.

No.

1

Yes

No

4

Yes

No

No

8

Yes

No

Yes

2

No

Yes

5

No

Yes

No

9

No

Yes

Yes

3

Yes

Yes

6

No

No

Yes

10

Yes

Yes

Yes

7

Yes

Yes

No

Selector Push Button Operators – Legend Plate And Contact Block Not Included Two Position Operators

Contact Blocks Required

1 — KA1

2 — KA1

1 = Contact Closed F = Free 0 = Contact Open D = Depressed Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

Left

Right

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

F D

1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0

1 0 0 1

...... ......

...... ......

...... ......

...... ......

1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 1 0 0

1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0

1 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1

Z

Y

R

T

P

S

Half Guard Black Insert

Cam

TQ1

TQ2

TQ36

TQ26

TQ42

TQ50

Full Guard Black Insert

TQ11

TQ12

TQ39

TQ48

TQ45

TQ53

Extended Guard Black Insert

TQ62

TQ56

TQ69

TQ59

TQ71

TQ73

Gloved Hand Knob For Selector Switch

Adapter Kit

Type

Allows a Type T Operator to be mounted in Type K mounting hole.

T7◆

Part Number 3042654250

◆ Fits onto Type TS1 knob.

127 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Foundry Duty Operators & Accessories

Padlock Attachments Latch Type Padlock Attachment

Cover Type Padlock Attachment

Selector Switch Padlock Attachment

Latch Type Padlock Attachment

Type

Type

Type

Type

TL1

TL2

TL3

TL5

Locks button in depressed position. Must be used with operator having standard half guard. Can be used with mushroom buttons.

(Padlock not furnished.) Must be used with operator having standard half guard.

(Padlock not furnished.)

Locks button (with Type TU cap) in depressed position. Does not include cap.

Maintained Contact Arrangement

Protective Cap

The Type TU1 thru 6 cap will prevent metal shavings and other foreign matter from interfering with proper operation of oil tight push buttons. They are for use with the KY, KZ and KYAF enclosures and can be used with TN legend plates.

Type

Color

Type

Black Red Brown Green Yellow

TU1 TU2 TU4 TU5 TU6

Watertight Cap

TM1 Use with two Type TR push buttons and one contact block. The contact block should always be assembled to the “Stop”operator. Not for use on illuminated push buttons.

Alternate Action (Push-on Push-off) Module This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T operators. Contact blocks mounted behind this module (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position when the operator is operated once and released to their normal position when the operator is operated again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001 KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of the 9001KA4 or a 9001KA6.

These caps are for use on the Class 9001 Type KYSS NEMA Type 4 water tight enclosures. To retain the watertight seal (NEMA Type 4), separately mounted legend plates must be used (not available from Square D).

Color

For Push Buttons Type

Type

Black Red Blue Brown Green Yellow

TU11 TU12 TU13 TU14 TU15 TU16

TU51 TU52 TU53 TU54 TU55 TU56

Clear Silicone Cap – For standard pilot lights For push to test pilot lights and illuminated push buttons

For Selector Sw.

TU17 TU27

Type K85

Push Button Wrench Type T1

Screwdriver

Simplifies installation of Type T units.

Type

Trim Washer Type

K69 Used to tighten mounting screws on Type K contact blocks and light modules.

TN5 For use where legend plate is not required. Keeps ringnut from marring panel finish.

Liner Part Number 310501401

128 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Foundry Duty Operators

Three Position Master Switches

Correct Drilling For Mounting All Devices Description

Symbol

3-Position Master Switch, Complete with Contact Block Maintained Contact Spring Return to Center

103 TS80E2 104◆ TS82D1

3-Position Master Switch, Without Contact Block ✶ ◆

Type ✶

TS80

These switches are furnished with special contact blocks. Symbol 104 is same as 103 except contacts A1 and B1 are not furnished.

Basic Operators Illuminated Push Button With Full Guard Less Color Cap And Light Module

Standard Pilot Light Less Color Cap And Light Module

Illuminated Push Button Without Guard And Push To Test Pilot Light Less Color Cap, Light Module And Contact Block

17⁄32" diameter hole may be cut with Greenlee knockout punch, No. 60246, available through electrical wholesalers.

Enclosure Minimum Spacings

Type

Type

Type

T1L

TP

T2L

Maintained Push Button With 13⁄8" Mushroom Button Button locks in the depressed position – Turning knurled ring releases operator to its normal position. Price includes nameplate: "Push-to-Stop Rotate Collar CW to Start". Color

Type

Black Red Green Brown Yellow Orange Blue

TRM3 TRM4 TRM20 TRM21 TRM22 TRM23 TRM24

Type TL1 or TL2 padlock attachments can be added to TR-Type operators without adding to overall dimensions or without interference to other operators mounted adjacent. Type TM1 maintained contact device may be installed on two push button units mounted from 11⁄16" (min.) to 21⁄2" (max.) apart, arranged either vertically or side by side. The contact block should always be assembled to the operator designated as Stop, Off or Safe.

Time Delay Push Button Timing period is adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds and begins after push button has been released. Devices require the space of two standard operators. Devices include a package of seven color inserts for color coding the push button. Contacts are quick make - quick break. Type listed is half guard version. Legend plate not included.

Description Timed Contact 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Type

TRD150

129 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Legend Plates & Contact Blocks

Contact Blocks All Type T Operators Accept Type KA Blocks. Types KA1 and KA3 N.C. contacts are direct opening.

Symbol

Type K

Equivalent Type T

Type

Type

KA1

TA

KA2

TA2

KA3

TA1

Two Type KA1

One Type TB

Two Type KA2

One Type TD

Two Type KA3

One Type TC

Type K

Type T

2 Pole Double Throw For Tandem Mounting With Type TB Contact Block Only Symbol

Type

Legend Plates Standard legend plate markings and special markings are listed in 30mm Push Buttons Types K and SK – order as Type TN2... or TN3... rather than Type KN. Example: Legend plate marked “Forward,” order TN206 or TN306.

TN-200

Special Legend Plates Description

Type

Double Headed

TN4

Extra large For customer's enclosure only. Minimum spacing between operators must be 25⁄16" vertically and 21⁄4" horizontally.

TN6

Maximum Number Of Lines And Characters For Type TN Legend Plates Type

TN2

TN3

TN4

TN6

Max. No. of Characters per Line

16

16

16

22

Max. No. of Lines

1

3

2

4

The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and is based on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading. When fewer characters than the maximum are required the size of the characters is changed to permit the best readability.

TF

Note: A Special Purpose Block is not required to mount a Type K Block in tandem.

Contact Block Rating — Maximum AC Type K and Type T AC Amperes – NEMA Type A600 Inductive Pilot Duty 35% Power Factor

Volts

120 240 480 600

Resistive 75% Power Factor

Make

Break

Continuous

Make, Break, and Continuous

60 30 15 12

6 3 1.5 1.2

10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10

Contact Block Rating – Maximum DC

Volts

120 240 600

Type K

Type T

DC Inductive and Resistive

DC Amperes Inductive Pilot Duty

Make and Break KA1

KA2 KA3

KA4

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 .... ....

KA5

Continuous Carrying Amperes

Make and Break

Continuous

1.1 0.55 0.2

10 10 10

2.2 .... ....

10 .... ....

Dimensions For dimensions of operators, see Approval Drawing Pads 900116, 9001-17, and 9001-18. These can be requested from your local Square D sales office.

130 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm Light Modules Standard Light Modules for Type T Control Units ➃ • Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only..

Voltage

2.78 in 70.61 mm

Standard Duty

Shallow Depth

For Use With Single Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated➀

Description

Light Module Type No.

Replacement Lamps ➂

Voltage Assembly Code

Rating

Lamp Number (ANSI)

Lamp Part Number

6 Vac-dc

Full Voltage

All

KM31

31

0.9 VA

755

2550101020

12-14 Vac-dc

Full Voltage

All

KM32

32

1.2 VA

756

2550101037

18 Vac-dc

Resistor

All

KM33

33

1.4 VA

756

2550101037

24-28 Vac-dc

Full Voltage

All

KM35

35

1.2 VA

757

2550101002

32 Vac-dc

Resistor

All

KM23

23

2.5 VA

757

2550101002

48 Vac-dc

Full Voltage

All

KM36

36

2.6 VA

48MB

2550101025

60 Vac-dc

Full Voltage

All

KM37

37

3.0 VA

60MB

2550101026

110-120 V, 25-30 Hz 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz

Transformer Transformer Flashing

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁

KM2 KM1 KMF1

2 1 F1

2.2 VA 2.4 VA 0.85 VA

1490 755 267

2550101003 2550101020 2550101036

120 Vac-dc 120 Vac-dc 120 Vac-dc

Resistor Full Voltage Neon

All All All Except ➁

KM38 KM38 KM11

38 38 11

3.0 VA 3.0 VA 0.2 VA

120MB 120MB NE51H

2550101027 2550101027 2550101013

208-220 V, 50-60 Hz

Transformer

All Except ➁

KM3

3

2.5 VA

755

2550101020

220-240 V, 25-30 Hz 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

Transformer Transformer Flashing

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁

KM4 KM7 KMF7

4 7 F7

2.2 VA 2.0 VA 2.0 VA

1490 755 267

2550101003 2550101020 2550101036

240 Vac-dc 240 Vac-dc

Resistor Neon

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX

KM25 KM12

25 12

6.0 VA 0.3 VA

120MB NE51H

2550101027 2550101013

277 V, 50-60 Hz

Transformer

All Except ➁

KM8

8

2.4 VA

755

2550101020

380 ac-dc

Neon

All Except ➁ and KX

KM13

13

0.4 VA

NE51H

2550101013

380-480 V, 50-60 Hz 480 Vac-dc

Transformer Neon

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX

KM5 KM14

5 14

2.8 VA 0.5 VA

755 NE51H

2550101020 2550101013

550 Vac-dc 550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

All Except ➁ and KX All Except ➁

KM15 KM6

15 6

0.6 VA 2.5 VA

NE51H 755

2550101013 2550101020

1.75 in 44.45 mm

Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type T Control Units • Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%. Voltage

Description

For Use With Single Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➃

Light Module Type No.

Voltage Assembly Code

Rating

24-28 Vac-dc 110-120 Vac-dc

Full Voltage Full Voltage

All Except ➁ and KX All Except ➁ and KX

KM55 KM58

55 58

1.2 VA 3.0 VA

Replacement Lamps ➂ Lamp Number Lamp Part (ANSI) Number 757 2550101002 120MB 2550101027

➀ 9001 K, SK, KX. ➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light. ➂ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106. ➃ 9001K, SK, T

File CCN

E42259 NKCR

File Class

LR 25490 3211 03

Marking

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.

1.87 47.50

1.89 48.01

1.73 43.94

1.87 47.50

Side View

Top View 1.12 28.45

Side View shown with 9001 KA contact block

131 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm List of Materials

Type TR push button

Type TP pilot light

Base — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting Ring nut, stem and mushroom knob — Anodised aluminium Stem on mushroom head type — Stainless steel Return spring — Stainless steel Seal washer — Cork/neoprene rubber Operating disc — Zinc plated steel Gasket — Buna N rubber Color inserts — Polyethylene Spring cup — Brass Allen screw on mushroom head — Steel alloy with Zinc oxide finish

Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy casting Ring nut — Aluminium Reflector — Aluminium Gasket — Buna N rubber Lens — Glass in aluminium holder with Buna N rubber seals or Polycarbonate Label — Paper Light module — Type KM as supplied by Square D Ashville

Type TP push to test and illuminated push button Type TS selector switch Ring nut, gasket, seal washer, return spring and spring cup same as Type TR above. Base and switch knob — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting Shaft — Stainless steel Cam — Zinc alloy Color inserts — Nylon Ball Bearing — Stainless steel Ball bearing spring — Stainless steel Screw and lock washer — Zinc plated steel Circlip — Spring steel with black phosphate finish Guide and spacer — Zinc plated steel (spring return type) Seal — Buna N rubber (spring return type) Various pins — Brass or zinc plated steel (spring return type)

Type TSK key operated selector switch As type TS except as follows: Lock barrel — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting Lock — Zinc alloy, brass tumblers, steel springs & stainless steel cap Knob — Zinc alloy with aluminium shaft Lock plate — Brass

Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy casting Ring nut — Aluminium Operator — Glass filled polyester Spring support — Zinc plated steel Gasket — Buna N rubber Seal — Nitrile rubber Spring — Stainless steel Lock ring — Trogamid Lens — Polycarbonate Label — Paper Light module and contact block — Type KM and KA as supplied by Square D Asheville

Type T contact block Contact block — Melamine phenolic Contacts — Silver Contact backing — Brass Moving contact — Copper/silver Operating button — Phenolic Stem — Brass Collar — Zinc alloy Terminal clamps — Zinc plated steel Screws — Zinc plated steel Cover — Epoxy/glass laminate Springs — Stainless steel

132 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide ™

Control Bus

Version 2 30 mm Push Button Modules Class 8330

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Options, Replacement Parts, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Wiring and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2 30 mm Push Button Modules

The Class 9001 Dedicated Module for 30mm Push Buttons provides an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus and any of the Square D Class 9001 Type K, SK, KX and T push buttons, pilot lights and selector switches (exceptions: 5-position joy stick and Type KX multi-lamp operators). Single-bit bus interface circuitry is used in this module. If multiplexed operation is used by the CPU interface card, the push button module is scanned every frame. This adaptor module is not capable of being multiplexed (See page 9 for details). Features • Can be used with any Type K, SK, KX or T push button, pilot light or selector switch operator (exceptions: 5-position joy stick operators and Type KX multi-lamp operators) • Performs control for illuminated and non-illuminated push button operators • Relay output dedicated modules are for illuminated operators with a standard Type KM light module • Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power supply or additional power conductors • Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater system flexibility • LED indicators provided on all modules showing power-on status, input status and output status – a convenient installation and troubleshooting aide • Modules use quick and easy IDC panel cabling including preterminated cable (Catalog #CBL2222P38C05L20) Assembly and Dimensions K, SK & T

KX

KM

Dedicated Modules for Non-illuminated Operators Catalog Number

Input Type Address A

Input Type Address B

Output Type

9001KA61

N.C.

N.O.

none

9001KA62

—

N.O.

none

9001KA63

N.C.

—

none

Dedicated Modules for Illuminated Operators Using a Class 9001 Type KM Light Module Input Type Address A

Catalog Number

Input Type Address B

9001KA60KM

—

—

Electromechanical Relay ◆

9001KA61KM

N.C.

N.O.

Electromechanical Relay ◆

9001KA62KM

—

N.O.

Electromechanical Relay ◆

9001KA63KM

N.C.

—

Electromechanical Relay ◆

◆ See page 135 for general purpose ratings.

Dedicated Modules Using Bus Powered LED Lamps for Illuminated Operators Input Type Address A

Catalog Number

Output Type Address B

9001KM350BPA

—

—

LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM350BPG

—

—

LED Lamp - Green

9001KM350BPR

—

—

LED Lamp - Red

9001KM351BPA

N.C.

N.O.

LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM351BPG

N.C.

N.O.

LED Lamp - Green

9001KM351BPR

N.C.

N.O.

LED Lamp - Red

9001KM352BPA

—

N.O.

LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM352BPG

—

N.O.

LED Lamp - Green

9001KM352BPR

—

N.O.

LED Lamp - Red

9001KM353BPA

N.C.

—

LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM353BPG

N.C.

—

LED Lamp - Green

9001KM353BPR

N.C.

—

LED Lamp - Red

1.2 N•m (11 lb-in)

Class 9001 Operator Type KS42

KS43

KS44

KS11 KS25

KS46

KS88

B

C

D

E

F

H

X

Address A (N.C.)

xoo

xoo

oox

xo

xoo

xooo

oxxo

Address B (N.O.)

oxo

oox

oxo

ox

oox

oxoo

ooxx

KM35•BP

Cam Type Knob Position

KA INSTALL LINER 0°

K, SK & T

Contacts Closed = x

Contacts Open = o

270°

1.6 41 2 .1

KA6•

90°

2.16 54.9

in mm

Input Type Address B

Selector Switch Logic Table (Operators only. Select 2-input modules from table above.)

KA6•KM

0 1.5 1 . 38

Output Type Address B

180°

With insulation displacement connector

INSTALL LINER

For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.

134 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2 30 mm Push Button Modules

Options, Replacement Parts and Accessories Catalog Number SPX30MMXCAM

Description 4-position selector switch cam for use with SERIPLEX modules for 30mm operators

SPXLEDA1

Replacement LED Lamp – amber

SPXLEDG1

Replacement LED Lamp – green

SPXLEDR1

Replacement LED Lamp – red

SPXUSER2

Replacement user label (has marking surface for addresses and control words). Quantity 10.

9001KXALLRT

Lamp Removal Tool

add a ‘T’ to the end of a catalog number ✻

Conformal coating. Increases Micro-Environmental Category rating from MEC pollution degree II to MEC pollution degree III, as outlined in IEC 664-1, section 2.5.1. Conformal coating meets MIL-I-46058C.

✻ Example: To order conformal coating for catalog number 9001KA61, change to 9001KA61T.

Specifications SERIPLEX bus power requirements: Nominal voltage rating Power supply voltage range at 25 °C

24 Vdc 19.2 to 30 Vdc including ripple

Bus power supply current drain (25 °C, 24 Vdc)

no relay output: relay output: bus powered LED lamp:

7 mA typical 16 mA typical 18 mA typical

Worst case bus power supply current drain (-25 °C, 30 Vdc)

no relay output: relay output: bus powered LED lamp:

8 mA 24 mA 24 mA

Module capacitance

75 pF typical

Bus clock frequency operating range

10 kHz to 200 kHz

Operating temperature

-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)

Storage Temperature

-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to +185 °F)

Relative Humidity

5 to 95%, non-condensing

Electromechanical Relay Rating (UL)

250 Vac, 30 Vdc, 2.5 A resistive pilot duty: AC - 180 VA, DC - 15 VA, C300

Micro-environmental category

II (per IEC664-1, Section 2.5.1)

Shock (IEC 68-2-27)

30 g, 3 axes, 11 ms duration, half sine pulse

Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)

10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm peak-to-peak, 2 hour in 3 axes

Noise immunity: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast transients Impulse

IEC801-2 IEC801-3 IEC801-4 IEC255-4

Compliance standards

UL File E114926, CSA File LR53531 (submitted), NOM-117

Screw terminal block specifications (relay versions only) conductor capacity

single conductor: UL 14 - 22 AWG, CSA 14 - 26 AWG two conductors: 18 AWG - 28 AWG 0.4 N•m (3.5 lb-in) 0.8 N•m (7.0 lb-in) 7 mm (0.3 in.)

Screw terminal torque Fracture torque◆ Wire strip length

Maximum allowable standard contact blocks mounted on a SERIPLEX dedicated module One Contact Block (Class 9001 Type KA1 through Class 9001 Type KA6) ◆ The fracture torque leads to damage of the screw shaft, stripping of the thread or deformation of the screw slot.

Wiring and LED Indicators Locating notch on Operator for selector switch applications

Actuating stem for input address B (N.O.) Actuating stem for input address A (N.C.)

File E114921 CCN NRAQ

® Bus cable connection Part #SPX 5IDC22, reference Bulletin #30298-050-01 for installation

Relay (output B)

File LR 53531 Class 2252 01

white (data) blue (clock)

Field Supply

red (V+)

S

black (common)

L

bare (sheild drain)

L=Class 9001 Type KM Light Module LED Indicators

OB

P

IB

IA

LED IA IB P OB

11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Color yellow yellow green yellow

Function and Address Input A Active Input B Active Bus Power Applied Output B Active

135

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2

Modified Panels by Square D

Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup. Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging from standard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies. In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, and dimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed. For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.

136 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type B and 30 mm Control Stations Class 9001

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page Type B Standard Duty Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Accessories and Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Type K, SK, and KX Industrial Duty Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Type K and Sk Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Type K, SK, KX, and T Flush Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Type K and SK Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Type KY and KZC Security Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations Standard duty control stations are designed for use with magnetic motor starters to govern the starting, stopping, or reversing of all types of electric motors. Push buttons are momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. Selector switches are maintained contact.

NEMA Type 1 Surface Mounting Type BG201

NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting (w/o pullbox) Type BF201

NEMA Type 4 Type BW243

NEMA Types 7-9 Type BR103

Control Stations Many items are stock or can be furnished as a quick ship using a “Universal” station plus accessories.

No. of Units

1

2

3

Surface Mounting NEMA Type 1 t

Stainless Steel Flush Plate (Pullbox k not included) t

Watertight and Dusttight NEMA Type 4 t

For Hazardous Locations Class I, Div. I & II Groups B, C and D Class II Div. I & II Groups E, F and G NEMA Types 7 & 9 t

Nameplate Markings and Features

Contact Symbol See page 141

Type

Type

Type

Type

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 3 3 3 16

BG101 BG102 BG103 BG104 BG107

BF101 BF102 ..... ..... BF107

BW146 BW147 BW151 BW148 BW159

BR101 ..... BR103 BR104 BR107

Off-on (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Selector Switch (w/o Legend Insert) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 17 19 or 17

BG111 BG112 BG114

BF111 BF112 BF114

..... ..... .....

..... ..... .....

Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Light (w/o Lens): 120 Vac or dc q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121 121 121

BG121 BG122 BG123

BF121 BF122 BF123

..... ..... .....

..... ..... .....

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Mushroom on Start and Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raise-Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Auto (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Red Mushroom on Stop, Both Buttons Maintained). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal (Maintained Contact w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145 146 145 145 145 146 146 146 146 145 146 25 10 10 10 10 10

BG201 BG202 BG203 BG204 BG205 BG206 BG207 BG208 BG209 BG210 BG211 BG214 BG215 BG216 BG217 ..... BG218

BF201 BF202 ..... ..... ..... BF206 BF207 BF208 BF209 BF210 BF211 BF214 BF215 BF216 BF217 ..... BF218

BW240 BW252 BW250 BW241 BW246 BW242 BW244 BW243 BW253 BW245 BW254 BW260 BW255 BW256 BW257 ..... BW258

BR204 BR202 BR203 BR204 BR205 BR206 BR207 BR208 BR209 BR210 BR211 BR214 BR215 BR216 BR217 BR219 BR218

Off-On (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Selector Switch & Pilot Light 120 Vac or dc (w/o Legend Insert & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 & 121 17 & 121

BG221 BG223

BF221 BF223

17 or 19& 121

BG224

BF224

Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) & Start (Push Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Selector Switch & Push Button (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 & 1

BG225

BF225

17 or 19& 16

BG226

BF226

Fast-Slow-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raise-Lower-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 8

BG301 BG302 BG303 BG304 BG305 BG306 BG316 BG322 BG325 BG326 BG307

BF301 BF302 BF303 BF304 BF305 BF306 ..... ..... ..... ..... BF307

Start-Stop, Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Push Buttons (2) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Maintained Contacts) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . On-Off (Maintained Contact) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Auto (Maintained Contacts), & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . Universal Push Buttons (Maintained Contact) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), & Start-Stop (Push Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . Universal Selector Switch & 2 Push Buttons (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . .

145 & 121

BG308

BF308

25 & 121 10 & 121 10 & 121 10 & 121

BG309 BG310 BG311 BG312

BF309 BF310 BF311 BF312

10 & 121 17 & 145 17 or 19 & 25

BG313 BG314 BG315

BF313 BF314 BF315

q “Universal” designates control stations without legend inserts, lenses or accessory kits. Universal stations plus separate legend inserts and other accessories listed on page 139 allow the user to conveniently build up standard or custom stations. k Use standard 2.0 or 2.13 inch deep wall boxes, single gang for Types BF1 – and BF2 – and two gang for Type BF3 –. t For replacement interiors, see page 140. Replacement enclosures (case and/or cover) are not available for Type BR devices. Lockout must be factory installed on NEMA Type 4 devices. However, replacement covers are available with the lockout feature as standard. See page 139. File E42259 CCN NKCR Marking File LR 25490 Class 3211 03

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 139 Replacement Parts. . . . Page 139-140 Replacement Interiors . . . . Page 140 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 141 Contact Symbols . . . . . . . . Page 141

138 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations Accessories and Legends

Mushroom Caps – Kits do not include legend insert; order separate legend insert from the tables below. EX: For red mushroom button marked STOP, order one 9001 Type B301 plus one 9001 Type B102. Color

Type

Replacement Covers for BF and BW

For NEMA TYPE 1 surface mounting stations Red

B301

Black

B302

Red

B303

For Types

For NEMA Type 4

Lockout Kit – For NEMA Type 1 surface mounting stations, bottom unit only. Can be used on either push button or on 2 or 3 position selector switch. Lockout cannot be used with mushroom cap.

Types

BF101-BF123 BF201-BF226 BF301-BF315 BW146-BW147 BW148 t BW149-BW159 BW240 BW241t BW242-BW260 t

3040000311 3040000302 3110104301 BWD108 BWD109 BWD108 BWD219 BWD220 BWD219

Replacement cover has lockout factory installed on cover.

Selector Switch Knob for Types BG & BF Selector Switches Sylvania Lamp No. 120PSB

Type B321

Replacement Lamp

Pilot Light Lenses For NEMA Type 1 Surface Mounting

For NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting

Type

Type

Red

B331

B341

Green

B332

B342

Color

Sylvania Lamp No.

Square D Part No.

120PSB

2550105005

Replacement Lamp Holder Type BGC124

Interchangeable Selector Switch Legend Plates Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts

Marking

For NEMA Type 1 Surface Mounting Push Button & Mushroom Caps

Start Stop Fast Slow Forward Reverse Open Close Raise Lower Up Down High Low On Off Hand Auto Jog Blank-Black Blank-Red

For NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting

For NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Types 7-9 Lever Type Square

For NEMA Type 4 Button Type Round

Mushroom Button Inserts For NEMA Type 4

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

B101 B102 B103 B104 B105 B106 B107 B108 B109 B110 B111 B112 B113 B114 B115 B116 B117 B118 B119 B129 B129R

B131 B132 B133 B134 B135 B136 B137 B138 B139 B140 B141 B142 B143 B144 B145 B146 B147 B148 B149 B159 B159R

B161 B162 B163 B164 B165 B166 B167 B168 B169 B170 B171 B172 B173 B174 B175 B176 B177 B178 B179 B189 B189R

B259 B260 .... .... B255 B256 B263 B264 B261 B262 B253 B254 .... .... B257 B258 B265 B266 .... B251 B252

B282 B283 .... .... B278 B279 B286 B287 B284 B285 B276 B277 .... .... B280 B281 B288 B289 .... B251 B252

Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.

For NEMA Type 1 Surface Mounting

Marking Off-On Hand-Off-Auto Manual-Auto Foward-Reverse Open-Close Open-Off-Close Hand-Auto Forward-Off-Reverse Summer-Winter Summer-Off-Winter Low-Off-High Up-Off-Down

For NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting

Type

Type

B201 B202 B203 B204 B205 B206 B207 B208 B209 B210 B211 B212

B231 B232 B233 B234 B235 B236 B237 B238 B239 B240 B241 B242

Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.

Legend Insert Kits (Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below, Type No. of kit.) Where Used:

Type Push Buttons

B100 (Incl's 1 each of B101 thru B119)

Selector Switches

B200 (Incl's 1 each of B201 thru B212)

Push Buttons

B130 (Incl's 1 each of B131 thru B149)

Selector Switches

B230 (Incl's 1 each of B231 thru B242)

For NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 7-9 Lever Type, Square

Push Button

B160 (Incl's 1 each of B161 thru B179)

For NEMA Type 4 Button Type, Round

Push Button

B250 (Incl's 1 each of B253 thru B266)

For NEMA Type 4 Button Type

Mushroom Button

B300 (Incl's 1 each of B276 thru B289)

For NEMA Type 1 Surface Mounting

For NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting

139 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations Replacement Parts

BOC361

Type BGC214 Type BGB214

(Type BGC contact block assemblies include cover.)

Replacement Interiors For Type B Standard Duty Push Button Stations For Control Station Types

Contact Block Assembly▲ Type

Contact Symbol

Terminal Block Wiring Receptacle Type

BF101—BF107

16

BOC107

BFB107

BF111—BF114

19 or 17

BOC114

BFB114

BF121—BF123

121

BOC123

BFB123

BF201—BF214

25

BOC214

BFB214

BF215—BF218

10

BOC218

BFB214

BF221—BF224

7 or 19 & 121

BOC224

BFB224

BF225—BF226

17 or 19 & 16

BOC226

BFB226

BF301—BF307

8

BOC214 & BOC107

BFB214 & BFB107

BF308—BF309

25 & 121

BOC214 & BOC123

BFB214 & BFB123

BF310—BF313

10 & 121

BOC218 & BOC123

BFB214 & BFB123

BF314—BF315

17 or 19 & 25

BOC214 & BOC114

BFB214 & BFB114

BG101—BG107

16

BGC107

BGB107

BG111—BG114

17 or 19

BGC114

BGB114

BG121—BG123

121

BGC123

BGB123

BG201—BG214

25

BGC214

BGB214

BG215—BG218

10

BGC218

BGB214

BG221—BG224

17 or 19 & 121

BGC224

BGB224

BG225—BG226

17 or 19 & 16

BGC226

BGB226

BG301—BG307 BG316—BG326

8

BGC307

BGB307

BG308—BG309

25 & 121

BGC309

BGB309

BG310—BG313

10 & 121

BGC313

BGB309

BG314—BG315

17 or 19 & 25

BGC315

BGB315

BR101—BR107

16

BOC107

BFB107

BR202—BR214

25

BOC214

BFB214

BR215—BR219

10

BOC218

BFB214

BW101—BW107

16

BOC107

BFB107

BW202—BW214

25

BOC214

BFB214

BW215—BW218

10

BOC218

BFB214

BW146—BW159

16

BOC360

BW240—BW260

25

BOC361

BW255—BW258

10

BOC362 “C” Shaped Mounting Bracket for 9001 BR Interior

Note: Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact block. Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded circuits need not be wired. q Order separate legend plates, if required, from listing on page 139.

3110112001

Electrical Contact Ratings AC – NEMA Type B600

DC – NEMA Type P600

Inductive 35% Power Factor Volts

120 240 480 600

Make

Resistive 75% Power Factor

Break

Amps

VA

Amps

VA

Continuous Carrying Amperes

30.5 15 7.5 6

3600 3600 3600 3600

3.75 1.5 0.75 0.6

360 360 360 360

5 5 5 5

Inductive and Resistive

Make, Break and Continuous Carrying Amperes

Volts

Make and Break Amperes

Continuous Carrying Amperes

5 5 5 5

120 240 600

1.1 0.55 0.2

5 5 5

140 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations Dimensions

Contact Symbols 120 V

Com

121 17

1

3

25

19

16

10

8

145

109

146

Approximate Dimensions Hazardous Location

Surface Mount

Type BR

Type BG

Cast Aluminum Enclosure

Glass Filled Polyester Cover 0.45 12

0.47 12

1.37 35

2.76

3.69 94

70

4.09

5.00

104

127

3.95 100

0.30 8 2X

4.35 110

6.36 162 ON

OFF

0.34 9

0.72

0.48

18

12

1.38

60 (2)

35

0.19 5

0.34 9

Dia Mtg Holes

0.72

0.48

16

12

1.38 35

2.06 1.03 52 26

0.17 4

2.06 1.03 52 26

(2)

2.19 56

C 30064-834

K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond. both ends

2.34 60 0.19 5

0.28 O 7 conduit centerline 2X 0 0.31 Mtg Holes 8

Dia Mtg Holes

1.37 35

Padlock Hole

1/2-14 NPT Pipe Tap Bottom Only

0.70 18

1.19 30

0.17 4

2.53 64 0.88 22

5.75 146

2.34

0.88 22

2.41 with 61 mushroom button

C 30052-834

K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond. both ends

Watertight & Dusttight

Flush Mount Type BF

Type BW

Stainless Steel

Cast Zinc Enclosure

3.28 83

2.76 70 2.25 57

.218 Dia. Mtg. Hole (2) Plcs.

0.61 15

4.50 114

3.75 95

4.25 108

1.63 41 1.81 46 2.28 58

4.56 116

2.13 54

1.38 35

.38 10

0.16 (4) Dia Mtg Holes 4

1.38 35

C 30064-835A

2.25 57

B 65075-060

3.38 86

141 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Industrial Duty Enclosures

Enclosures Only (For Customer Assembly) UL Types 1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 No. of Units

1 2 3 4 6 9 12 16 20 25 30

UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ➀

UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 ➀

Surface Mounting

Flush Mounting without Pullbox ➂ ➃

Surface Mounting

Sheet Steel

Cast Zinc

Die Cast Aluminum ➃

Stainless Steel (304) ➄

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

KYAF1 KYAF2 KYAF3 KYAF4 KYAF6 KYAF9 KYAF12 KYAF16 KYAF20 KYAF25 KYAF30

KZ11 KZ21➁ KZ31➁ KZ41➁ KZ6 KZ9 KZ12 KZ16 Not Avail. Not Avail. Not Avail.

KY1 KY2➁ KY3➁ KY4➁ KY6 KY9 KY12 KY16 Not Avail. Not Avail. Not Avail.

KYSS1 KYSS2 KYSS3 KYSS4 KYSS6 KYSS9 KYSS12 KYSS16 KYSS20 KYSS25 KYSS30

SKY1 SKY2 SKY3 SKY4 SKY6 SKY9 SKY12 SKY16 SKY20 SKY25 Not Avail.

Surface Mounting Polymeric (Plastic)

➀ Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13. ➁ Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical. ➂ For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available. ➃ Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures. ➄ Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.

Custom Built Control Stations The catalog numbers shown include the enclosure only. A complete assembled control station is the enclosure plus all control units to be installed. Orders must be accompanied with a key sheet (M-7687)➅ or sketch showing all control units in their desired locations. Specify the marking on the nameplates for the enclosure. The standard nameplate size is 1.69" (43 mm) by 0.5" (13 mm) inches. It has a black field with white letters. For nameplates other than our standard, contact your local Square D Sales Office. There is an additional charge to move or add an additional conduit hole or change the diameter of the conduit. Example: Add a 1 inch conduit to the top (nonstandard location) of a KY6 enclosure and increase the bottom conduit from 3/4" to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm). There would be an additionall charge for the top conduit and the bottom conduit. If 20 or more identical stations are ordered at one time, there is no additional charge.

UL Types1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 No. of Units

1 2 3 4 6 9 12 16 20 25 30

UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ➀

UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 (1)

Surface Mounting

Flush Mounting without Pullbox ➂ ➃

Surface Mounting

Sheet Steel

Cast Zinc

Die Cast Aluminum ➃

Stainless Steel (304) ➄

Type

Type

Type

Type

Type

KYAF100 KYAF200 KYAF300 KYAF400 KYAF600 KYAF900 KYAF1200 KYAF1600 KYAF2000 KYAF2500 KYAF3000

KZ110 KZ210➁ KZ310➁ KZ410➁ KZ60 KZ90 KZ120 KZ160 Not Avail. Not Avail. Not Avail.

KY10 KY20➁ KY30➁ KY40➁ KY60 KY90 KY120 KY160 Not Avail. Not Avail. Not Avail.

KYSS100 KYSS200 KYSS300 KYSS400 KYSS600 KYSS900 KYSS1200 KYSS1600 KYSS2000 KYSS2500 KYSS3000

SKY100 SKY200 SKY300 SKY400 SKY600 SKY900 SKY1200 SKY1600 SKY2000 SKY2500 Not Avail.

Surface Mounting Polymeric (Plastic)

➀ Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13. ➁ Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical. ➂ For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available. ➃ Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures. ➄ Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office. ➅ For a copy of M-7687 keysheet, reference D-Fax  #1143 or see pages 148-149.

Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147 Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149

142 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm Control Stations

Type KZ310

Type KY30

Type KYAF900

Type KYSS300

Type SKY200

Control Stations Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks in tandem (total of four blocks) on non-illuminated operators and two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators.

Assembled Control Stations – UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ▲ Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures No of Units

1

2

3

Legend Plate Marking And Features

Type

Consists Of Contact Blocks

Legend Plates

Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Run (Selector Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Sel. Sw). (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK111 KYK121 ◆ KYK18 KYK110 KYK122 ◆

KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1

KS43B KS43B KS11B KS11B KS11B

KA1 KA51 KA1 KA1 KA51

KN260 KN260 KN242 KN244 KN244

Red 120 Vac Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (Mushroom Button). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK120 ◆ KYK11 KYK125 ◆ KYK12 KYK13 KYK14

KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1

KP1R31 KR1B KR1B KR4B KR1R KR4R

... KA1 KA51 KA1 KA1 KA1

... KN201 KN201 KN201 KN202 KN202

Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Mushroom (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass (Red Enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK15 KYK124 ◆ KYK123 ◆ KYK116 KYK117

KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1 KY1S1

KR3R,K4 KR3R,K4 KR4R,K4 K15 K15

KA1 KA51 KA51 KA1 KA1

KN202 KN202 KN202 KN799RP KN799RP

Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK24 KYK224 KYK218 KYK222 ◆ KYK221 KYK26

KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2

KR1B,KR1B KR1B,KR3R,K4 KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR3R KR11GR KR1B,KR1B

KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1 KA51,KA51 KA1 KA1,KA1

KN206,KN207 KN218,KN202 KN203,KN204 KN203,KN204 KN203,KN204 KN209,KN208

Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK21 KYK223 ◆ KYK23 KYK27 KYK220 ◆ KYK22 KYK25

KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2 KY2

KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR3R,K4 KR11GR KR11GR KR1B,KR4R KR1B,KR1B

KA1,KA1 KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1 KA1 KA51 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1

KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN211,KN210

Forward-Reverse-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK35 KYK31 KYK326

KY3 KY3 KY3

KS11B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KA1,KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1

KN239,KN201,KN202 KN206,KN207,KN202 KN206,KN207,KN202

KYK322 ◆ KYK34

KY3 KY3

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4 KR1B,KR1B,KR3R

KA51,KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1,KA1

KN206,KN207,KN202 KN214,KN215,KN202

KYK36 KYK33 KYK327

KY3 KY3 KY3

KS11B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KA1,KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1

KN242,KN201,KN202 KN209,KN208,KN202 KN209,KN208,KN202

KYK323 ◆ KYK317

KY3 KY3

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4 KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R

KA51,KA51,KA51 KA2,KA3

KN209,KN208,KN202 KN200,KN201,KN202

KYK321 ◆ KYK324 KYK32 KYK325

KY3 KY3 KY3 KY3

KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R KP38R31,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1,KA1

KN200,KN201,KN202 KN200,KN201,KN202 KN211,KN210,KN202 KN211,KN210,KN202

KYK328 ◆

KY3

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KA51,KA51,KA51

KN211,KN210,KN202

Jog/Run-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Seated Contacts and Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 120 Vac/dc Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enclosure

Operators

▲ Control stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III. ◆ Control station consists of components that are UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D.

Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144 Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 142 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147 Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149

143 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm Control Stations

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ◆ No. of Units

Legend Plate Marking And Features

Type

1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

3

Consists Of Enclosure

Operators

Contact Blocks

Legend Plates

KYSS101 KYSS103 KYSS105 KYSS110 KYSS111

KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1

KR1B KR3R KR3R with K5 KS11B KS43B

KA1 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA1

KN201 KN202 KN202 KN244 KN260

Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSS201 KYSS203 KYSS205 KYSS210

KYSS2 KYSS2 KYSS2 KYSS2

KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR3R with K5 KR1B,KR1B KR11U

KA1,KA3 KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1

KN201,KN202 KN201,KN202 KN211,KN210 KN201,KN202

Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSS301 KYSS302 KYSS303 KYSS304 KYSS308 KYSS309 KYSS310 KYSS311

KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5 KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5 KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5 KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5

KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3

KN206,KN207,KN202 KN211,KN210,KN202 KN209,KN208,KN202 KN214,KN215,KN202 KN206,KN207,KN202 KN211,KN210,KN202 KN209,KN208,KN202 KN214,KN215,KN202

◆ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13 ✻ No. of Units

Legend Plate Marking And Features

Type

1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

3

Consists Of Enclosures

Operators

Contact Blocks

Legend Plates

KYSK101 KYSK103 KYSK105 KYSK110 KYSK111

KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1 KYSS1

SKR1B SKR3R SKR3R with K5 SKS11B SKS43B

KA1 KA3 KA3 KA1 KA1

KN101WP KN102RP KN102RP KN144WP KN160WP

Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSK201 KYSK203 KYSK205 KYSK210

KYSS2 KYSS2 KYSS2 KYSS2

SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR3R with K5 SKR1B,SKR1B SKR11U

KA1,KA3 KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA1

KN101WP,KN102RP KN101WP,KN102WP KN111WP,KN110WP KN101WP,KN102WP

Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSK301 KYSK302 KYSK303 KYSK304 KYSK308 KYSK309 KYSK310 KYSK311

KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3 KYSS3

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5 SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5 SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5 SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5

KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP

✻ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13▲ No. of Units

Legend Plate Marking And Features

Type

1

Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Consists Of Enclosure

Operators

Contact Blocks

Legend Plates

SKY121■ SKY111 SKY107 SKY108 SKY122 ■ SKY110

SKY1 SKY1 SKY1 SKY1 SKY1 SKY1

SKS43B SKS43B SKR1B SKS11B SKS11B SKS11B

KA51 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA51

KN160WP KN160WP KN118WP KN143WP KN144WP

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . .

SKY101 SKY125 ■ SKY103 SKY105 SKY124 ■

SKY1 SKY1 SKY1 SKY1 SKY1

SKR1B SKR1B SKR3R SKR3R,K5 SKR3R,K5

KA1 KA1 KA51 KA3 KA3 KA51

KN144WP KN101WP KN101WP KN102RP KN102RP KN102RP

Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SKY204 SKY222 ■ SKY206 SKY201

SKY2 SKY2 SKY2 SKY2

SKR1B,SKR1B SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B SKR1B,SKR3R

KA1,KA1 KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1 KA1,KA3

KN106WP,KN107WP KN103WP,KN104RP KN109WP,KN108WP KN101WP,KN102RP

Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . . Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SKY203 SKY220 ■ SKY223 ■ SKY205

SKY2 SKY2 SKY2 SKY2

SKR1B,SKR1R,K5 SKR11GR SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B

KA1,KA3 KA51 KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1

KN101WP,KN102RP KN101WP,KN102RP KN101WP,KN102RP KN111WP,KN110WP

Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . .

SKY301

SKY3

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

KA1,KA1,KA3

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP

SKY322 ■ SKY304 SKY303 SKY323 ■

SKY3 SKY3 SKY3 SKY3

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

KA51,KA51,KA51 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA51,KA51,KA51

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP

SKY315A SKY305 SKY302

SKY3 SKY3 SKY3

SKP1R31,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3 KA1,KA1,KA3

KN101WP,KN102RP KN101WP,KN118WP,KN102RP KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP

SKY328 ■

SKY3

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

KA51,KA51,KA51

KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP

2

3

Red 120 VAC Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▲ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III. ■ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D.

144 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Flush Plates

Stainless Steel NEMA Type 1 Flush Plates

Two Unit

These flush plates accept Type K, SK, KX and T operators and contact blocks and may be used with a standard 2 x 3 general purpose switch box. A 21/2" deep box should be used with two Type K contact blocks mounted side by side. If two Type K contact blocks mounted in tandem are needed, a 31/2" deep box should be used. Although oiltight/watertight operators are used, an assembled station using the flush plates is not oiltight/watertight. The kits include the stainless steel flush plate, cover screws and a set of liners. The liners must be used to maintain Approximate Dimensions electrical clearance. Commercial Pull Box

Number of Units

Description

Type Number

1

1 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners

K25

2

2 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners

K26

3

3 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners

K27

4

4 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners

K28

A

3.13 79.5 2.0 50.8

B

Dimensions (inches)

Number of Units

A✻

B

1

125/32 " (45 mm)

23/4 " (70 mm)

2

319/32 " (91 mm)

49/16 " (116 mm)

3

513/32 " (36 mm)

63/8 " (162 mm)

4

7

7/

32 "

(183 mm)

8 3/

16 "

Commercial Pull Box

4.50 114.3

2.63 66.9

(208 mm)

✻ Center to center of operators is 1 13/16" (46 mm).

General Purpose NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting Control Station With Pull Box For Type K Control Units (Stations Are Not Oiltight) Number of Units 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Enclosure Only For Customer Assembly

Custom Built Factory Assembled Control Stations

Type

Type

KZP1 KZP2 KZP3 KZP4 KZP5 KZP6 KZP7 KZP8

KZP10 KZP20 KZP30 KZP40 KZP50 KZP60 KZP70 KZP80 Special Features

Type 304 Stainless Steel Flush Plate (Form Y242) No. of Units 1-4 5-8 Omit Pull Box (Form Y243) No. of Units 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8

Dimensions (Type KZP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 147

145 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm Enclosure Dimensions

Location Of Control Units

SKY4 KY1 KYAF1 KZ11 KYSS1 SKY1

KY2 KYAF2 KZ21 KYSS2 SKY2

KY3 KYAF3 KZ31 KYSS3 SKY3

KY16 KYAF16 KZ16 KYSS16 SKY16

KY6 KYAF6 KZ6 KYSS6 SKY6

KY4 KYAF4 KZ41 KYSS4

KYAF20 KYSS20 SKY20

Type KY

KY9 KYAF9 KZ9 KYSS9 SKY9

KY12 KYAF12 KZ12 KYSS12 SKY12

KYAF25 KYSS25 SKY25

KYAF30 KYSS30

Type KZ

R-Pt. in bottom as std.

0.22 (4) 6 Dia. Mtg. Holes Gasket cemented to cover

L

H C

Table for Type KY and KZ

M-N 0.16 4 A D 0.25 6

2.50

2.13

64

54

C65075-239

K G

C30052-170

J E

B

0.25 6

1 2 3 4 6 9 12 16

Overall Dimensions A

B

4 35/8 35/8 53/4 35/8 71/2 35/8 91/4 63/4 8 91/4 8 91/4 10 113/4 101/2

Mounting Dim. KY

C 317/32 317/32 317/32 317/32 327/32 327/32 45/32 45/32

Conduit

KZ

D

E

F

3 3 3 3 55/8 81/8 81/8 105/8

23/4 41/2 61/4 8 67/8 67/8 87/8 93/8

31/8 31/8 31/8 31/8 61/4 83/4 83/4 111/4

H

G

Cover Thickness

Other Dimensions

R

J

3 31/2 11/8 / -14 — 3/4-14 51/4 11/8 13/4 4 1 3 7 1 /8 /4-14 13/4 3/ -14 83/4 11/8 13/4 3/4-14 71/2 13/8 2 4 71/2 13/8 1-111/2 2 91/2 119/32 11/4-111/2 2 10 119/32 11/2-111/2 2

KY

KZ

M

N

K

L

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 21/4

10-24 x 5/8 10-24 x 5/8 10-24 x 5/8 10-24 x 5/8 8-32 8-32 8-32 8-32

1.18 .50 1.18 .50 1.18 .50 1.18 .50 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 .88 .88 .88 .88

Inside Dim.

Conduit For Type KYSS Only

Table for Type KYAF and KYSS F

Type KYAF Type KYSS A D 2.50 64

31 8

No. of Units

(4) .31 Dia. Mtg. Holes 8

2.50 64

B E

Overall Dimensions

No. of Units

A

Mounting Dimensions

B

C

D

E

F

G

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

1

4.18

106

5.24

133

3.63

92

2.25

57

4.62

117

3.41

87

3

2

4.18

106

7.74

197

3.63

92

2.25

57

7.12

181

3.41

87

3

3

4.18

106

10.24

260

3.63

92

2.25

57

9.62

244

3.41

87

3

4

4.18

106

12.74

324

3.63

92

2.25

57

12.12

308

3.41

87

3

6

7.43

189

11.37

289

4.34

110

5.50

140

10.75

273

4.13

105

3

9

9.68

246

11.37

289

4.34

110

7.75

197

10.75

273

4.13

105

/4-14 /4-14 /4-14 /4-14 /4-14

1-11 1/2

12

9.68

246

13.87

352

4.34

110

7.75

197

13.25

337

4.13

105

1 1/4-111/2

16

11.93

303

13.87

352

4.34

110

10.00

254

13.25

337

4.13

105

1 1/2-111/2

20

11.93

303

16.37

416

4.34

110

10.00

254

15.75

400

4.13

105

1 1/2-111/2

25

14.18

360

16.37

416

4.34

110

12.25

311

15.75

400

4.13

105

(2)1 1/2-111/2

30

14.18

360

18.87

479

4.34

110

12.25

311

18.25

464

4.13

105

(2)1 1/2-111/2

A C F

C65075-176

1.70 43 G Conduit Hub Bottom Only (Type KYSS Only)

146 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm Enclosure Dimensions

Type SKY Enclosures

Flush Mount Sheet Steel Type KZP

4.00 108

A

A

C

C H (4 pls)

(4) 0.25 Dia. Mtg. Holes 6

H (4 pls) 1.00

2.25 57 D

2.25 57

B

E

D 2.25 57

C Mtg.

D

A B

B E G D E F

0.21 Dia. 5 (4 pls)

.75 19

2.00 51

F

3.00 76

1.68 43 3.36 85

G For 1, 2 & 3 unit only

Glass Polymeric Type SKY

H

F

plaster alignment

K.O. for 1/2, 3/4, 1 conduit Top, Bottom & Back

1.06 27

Class 9001 Type KZP

Conduit Conduit Height Size Location G

0.65 max

3.45 87

0.28 7

D30464-152

E

Mtg. Hole

2.50 63

sky 25 only (2)1.50 Dia. holes 38

Mtg. Dim.

E

D

IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

IN

C mm

Letter Dimensions

Overall Dim. B

IN

mm

IN

No. of Units

A mm

IN

mm

Type

A

B

C

D

E

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

mm

IN

KZP1

7.56

192

5.56

141

6.38

162

3.78

96

–

mm –

7.44

189

8.25

210

3.72

94

2.00

51

0.31 8

0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88

99

4.88 124

2.94

75

6.63 169

3.81 97

1

KZP2

9.43

240

0.31 8

0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88

99

4.88 124

2.94

75

6.63 169

3.81 97

2

KZP3

11.30

287

9.31

236

10.12

257

3.65

93

2.00

51

0.31 8

0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88

99

7.13 181

2.94

75

8.88 226

3.81 97

3

KZP4

13.18

335

11.18

284

12.00

305

3.59

91

2.00

51

0.31 8

0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120

6.75 172

4.00 102

7.53 191

7.53 191

4

KZP5

15.06

383

13.06

332

13.88

353

3.53

90

2.00

51

0.31 8

0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120

8.88 226

4.00 102

9.50 241

7.50 191

6

KZP6

16.93

430

14.94

379

15.75

400

3.47

88

2.00

51

0.31 8

1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273

6.00 153 11.34 288

9.41 239

9

KZP7

18.81

478

16.81

427

17.62

448

3.40

86

2.00

51

0.31 8

1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273

6.00 153 11.34 288

9.41 239

12

KZP8

20.68

525

18.69

475

19.50

495

3.34

85

2.00

51

0.31 8

1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324

8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291

16

0.31 8

1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324

8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291

20

0.31 8

1.50 38 2.00 51 6.25 159 14.63 372 10.00 254 15.47 393 13.47 342

25

147 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Key Sheet

CONTROL GROUP

KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE “K”, “KX”, “SK” OR “T” ASSEMBLED OILTIGHT CONTROL STATIONS

CUSTOMER

INVOICE NUMBER

CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER

DATE

CLASS

QUANTITY

9001 TYPE

LIST PRICE EACH, DS-1

TOP TYPE NUMBER KEY

1

Select Type Numbers from Catalog Digest

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

1. Operator or Closing Plate. Include “H” No. for Contact Blocks Assembled to Operator. Example – KR1B-H13

A

1

G

1

N

1

U

1

AA

2. Attachment or Protective Cap. Example – KU-1 3. Legend Plate Type Number. Example – KN-201 4. Legend Plate Marking. – Use Only if Special Marking is Required. Example: Line 3. – KN-299 Line 4. – ”Panic”

1

B

1

H

1

P

1

V

1

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

BB

For Further Instructions – See Reverse Side 1

C

1

J

1

Q

1

W

1

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

1

D

1

K

1

R

1

X

1

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

1

E

1

L

1

S

1

Y

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

F

1

M

1

T

1

Z

DD

1

2

1

CC

EE

1

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

FF

148 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Ordering Instructions INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING ASSEMBLED CONTROL STATIONS 1. Use separate Key Sheet for each different control station arrangement on order. 2.

3.

4.

Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)

Select locations on sketch (reverse side) which illustrate manner in which station is to be mounted. Example: Selection of location A, B, C and D indicates a four unit station mounted with its long axis vertical and the legend plates mounted accordingly. Selection of locations A, G, N and U indicates mounting with long axis horizontal. Each interlock attachment Type K-3 must be specified at two adjacent locations. Type KR-11 or Type KR-12 must be specified at two adjacent locations. Type KRD Time Delay Units require space equal to two push button mounting holes. The unused hole must be covered with at Type K-51 or K-52 Closing Plate. The time delay unit must be positioned with the contacts adjacent to the unused hole. The unused hole may be located above, below, right or left of the unit.

Positions 1

2

Total Circuits 3

Circuit Symbol

4 1 N.O. 1 N.C.

H1

KA-1

H2

KA-1

KA-1

H3

KA-1

KA-1

KA-1

H4

KA-1

KA-1

KA-1

H5

KA-2

H6

KA-3

H7

KA-2

KA-2

H8

KA-3

KA-3

2 N.C.

2 N.O. 2 N.C. 3 N.O. 3 N.C. KA-1

4 N.O. 4 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. 2 N.O.

H9

KA-4

KA-1

1 N.O. 1 E.C.N.O. 2 N.C.

H10

KA-4

KA-5

1 E.C.N.O. 1 E.C.N.C. 1 N.C. KA-1

3 N.O. 3 N.C.

KA-3

2 N.O. 2 N.C.

Types KN-3 and KN-4 legend plates will not fit upright on 2, 3 or 4 unit Type KY or Type KZ enclosures with long axis vertical. Type KYC enclosures must use Type KN-8 legend plates.

H11

KA-1

KA-1

H12

KA-2

KA-3

H13

KA-1

1 N.O. 1 N.C.

5.

Large (2 1/4” Dia.) mushroom button operators can not be mounted in adjacent locations.

H14

KA-3

1 N.C.

6.

Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators (Types K, SK and T only).

H36

KA-2

1 N.O.

KA-2

Location of Control Units – Types K, KX, SK and T

SKY-400 KY-10 KYAF-100 KYSS-100 KZ-110 SKY-100

KY-160 KYAF-1600 KYSS-1600 KZ-160 SKY-1600

KY-20 KYAF-200 KYSS-200 KZ-210 SKY-200

KY-30 KYAF-300 KYSS-300 KZ-310 SKY-300

KYAF-2000 KYSS-2000 SKY-2000

KY-40 KYAF-400 KYSS-410 KZ-410

KY-60 KYAF-600 KYSS-600 KZ-60 SKY-600

KY-90 KYAF-900 KYSS-900 KZ-90 SKY-900

KYAF-2500 KYSS-2500 SKY-2500

KY-120 KYAF-1200 KYSS1200 KZ-120 SKY-1200

KYSS-3000

149 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types KY and KZC — Security Control Stations Application Data, Features Standard Features • All cylinders are random keyed. • Key operators are all spring return from both sides to center, maintained contact not available. • Key withdrawal is in the center position only. • Cover is mechanically interlocked with the box to make it difficult for unauthorized people to gain entrance into the enclosure. • Cover is securely held in place by allen screws. • Cylinders are of builders hardware type, which permits keying stations to the rest of the cylinders in a development. • Cylinder legend plate marking is “OPEN-CLOSE.” • An optional push button is available. The legend plate marking is “STOP.”

Description

Type of Cylinder Cylinder Finish

Type

Type

KY198 KY199 KY197

KZC198 KZC199 KZC197

KY196

KZC196

KY195

KZC195

KY194

KZC194

KY193

KZC193

Sargent

Chrome Maximum Security Cylinder

KY192

KZC192

Emhart Yale Best

Chrome Brass Chrome Complete With Core◆ (6 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted▲ (6 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Complete With Core◆ (7 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted▲ (7 Tumbler Pins) Chrome

KY298 KY299 KY297

KZC298 KZC299 KZC297

KY296

KZC296

KY295

KZC295

KY294

KZC294

KY293

KZC293

Chrome Maximum Security Cylinder

KY292

KZC292

Best Best Best Schlage

Best Key Operator With Stop Button

Satin Chrome Finish Flush Mtd. W/Box

Cast Aluminum Enclosure ✻

Chrome Brass Chrome Complete With Core◆ (6 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted▲ (6 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Complete With Core◆ (7 Tumbler Pins) Chrome Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted▲ (7 Tumbler Pins) Chrome

Emhart Yale Best

Key Operator Only

Special Features

Best Best Schlage Sargent

UL Listed File E42259 CNN NKCR CSA Listed File LR25490 Class 321103 Type KY192 Type KZC299

Electrical Ratings Key Operator: One Class 9007 Type AO2 snap switch is used for the “OPEN” position and one snap switch is used for the “CLOSE” position. See page 151 for electrical ratings of the 9007 AO2. Stop Button: One Class 9001 Type KA1 contact block is used on the optional push button. See page 151 for 9001KA1 electrical ratings. (Note: The KA1 contact block has a maximum voltage rating of 300 volts (NEMA A300) when used in the Type KZC station.) Dimensions Surface Mount Type KY 2

1

Repair Parts Replacement or duplicate keys: Emhart, Yale, or Schlage - local distributor, hardware store, or lock shop that duplicates keys. Square D can supply and deliver in 5 weeks. BEST – Must purchase from local Best Lock Corporation representative. Sargent – must purchase from Square D. Keys supplied with our security control station are registered to the Square D Company.

1 8

3

13 32

3

3 5 8 3 Mtg

B30064-682 35 8

5 16 5 8

5 16 3 Mtg 5 8 5

1 4 8

✻ Meets NEMA Type 3R requirements. ◆ When Best Lock stations are supplied with core, customer should contact local Best Lock representative to change core. ▲ When Best Lock stations are supplied without core, customer must purchase core separately from Best Lock Company, and customer can subsequently change core at his convenience.

Contact Your Local Square D Sales Office If: • Master keying is required. • Keying several stations alike is required. • Station is to be keyed to a specific key number. • Nonstandard legend plates are required. • Extra keys are required. • A specific type of keyway is required.

3 -14 Conduit Top 4 (4) 7 Dia. Mtg. Holes 32

9 Inside Dim. 16

7 8

4

3 2 4 Mtg

1 Mtg 2

Flush Mount Type KZC

4 Mtg. 21 3 2 4

19 32

19 32

4 Mtg. 3 21 2 4

27 32 Max 0 Min

Plaster Adjustment

21 16

1 2 16 7 7 16

9 3 716 6 8 Mtg.

59 16

21 16

1"

7 16 1 8 4 Mtg.

21 16 (14 )1/4 Dia. Mtg. Holes

1"

B30064-683 3 16

13 3 16 3 13 32

Wall Surface

1 116 7 3 16

1 3 K.O. for 2 4 1" Conduit Top, Bottom and Back

9 32

Replacement enclosures are not sold. Replacement cores or cylinders are not sold.

150 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Contact Blocks The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are FINGERSAFE® contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA31, KA3, and KA33 N.C. contacts are direct opening. Standard Contact Blocks Description

Symbol

Contact Blocks With Binder Head Screws (not FINGERSAFE ® Contact Blocks)

Type Symbol KA1

Gold Flashed Contacts With Standard Pressure Wire Terminals

Type

Quantity

Type

KA21

25-Up ▲

KA31

KA22

25-Up ▲

KA32

KA23

25-Up ▲

KA33

KA24

25-Up ▲

KA34

KA25

25-Up ▲

KA35

(Clear Cover)

KA2 (Green Cover) N.O. Early Closing KA3 N.C. Contact Late Opening

(Red Cover)

▲ Minimum order quantity is 25.

KA4

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Provide:

KA5

• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors • Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks) • Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)

N.O. Contact Early Closing (Clear Cover)

N.C. Contact Late Opening

Symbol

(Red Cover)

Type

Symbol

Type

KA1G

KA4G N.O. Contact Early Closing

KA6

N.O. Contact Early Closing

KA2G

KA5G

N.C. Contact Late Opening

(Green Cover) KA3G

KA6G

Additional Circuit Arrangements Available Sequencing ✻ N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.O. Contact on KA1

KA4

Overlapping ✻ N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.C. Contact of KA5 Opens

KA4

N.O. Contact Early Closing

KA1

Order One Type KA4 and One Type KA1

KA5

Order One Type KA4 and One Type KA5

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals. Symbol

Type KA12

✻ For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.

KA13

Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9001 Type KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G AC

DC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor

Volts

Make

Break

Amperes

VA

Amperes

VA

Continuous Carrying Amperes

60 30 15 12

7200 7200 7200 7200

6.0 3.0 1.5 1.2

720 720 720 720

10 10 10 10

120 240 480 600

Resistive 75% Power Factor Make, Break and Continuous Amperes

Volts

10 10 10 10

125 250 600

Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type A600) Make and Break KA1

KA2, KA3

KA4

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 ..... .....

Continuous KA5, KA6 Carrying Amperes 1.1 0.55 0.2

10 10 10

Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9007 Type AO2 Switch Contact Type Action

AO-2

SPDT

Direct Opening Contacts to Meet IEC 947-5-1 Requirements for Positive Opening Contacts

No

AC – 50 or 60 Hz Inductive 35% Power Factor Volts 120 240 480 600

Make

Break

Amps

VA

Amps

VA

40 20 10 8

4800 4800 4800 4800

15 10 6 5

1800 2400 2880 3000

DC

Resistive 75% Power Factor Make and Break Amperes 15 10 6 5

Inductive and Resistive Volts 125 250 600 ....

Make and Break Amperes

AC or DC

Single Throw

Double Throw

Continuous Carrying Amperes

2.0 0.5 0.1 ....

0.5 0.2 0.02 ....

15 15 15 15

151 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. Knowing what type of hazardous location exists will permit you to select the most economical solution to your application. If you're not sure what type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” chart may help. If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.

All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire. Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks Suitable for use on low energy level circuits Description

Symbol

Type KA41

KA42

Summary Of Classification Chart Class

Division

I. Gas

1. Hazard May Exist May Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

Group

KA43

A. Acetylene B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen

KA44

C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene) KA45

D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol) 2. Potential Hazard A. May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances. B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location. II. Dust

1. Hazard May Exist May Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

A. Acetylene

D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol) E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity 102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)

III. Fibers

Division

Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings

2. Handling and Storage Areas

Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings

1

A

1.

Intrinsically Safe System ①

1

B, C, D

1. 2.

9001 BR station Intrinsically Safe System ①

1. I

2

A

9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁ Intrinsically Safe System ①

2.

II

II

1

2

B, C, D

E, F, G

E, F

1. 2.

2

3. 1. 2.

9001 BR station Intrinsically Safe System ①

1. 2.

9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁ Intrinsically Safe System ①

G

1. 2. 3.

III

1, 2

Symbol

Type KA51

–

KA53

9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁ Intrinsically Safe System ①

3. II

Description

KA52

I

2

The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator is the same for standard contact blocks, except: • On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M” mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem. • On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem. • On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.

Use

Group(s)

I

I

Cont. 0.5 A 0.5 A

Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks

1. Production Areas

For Class

G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)

Res. 0.25 A 8 VA

32/30 120/100

C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)

G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm) 2. Potential Hazard A. May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.

Max. Volts AC/DC

B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen

Maximum Load Ind. 0.10 A 3 VA

1. 2. 3.

9001 BR station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂ Intrinsically Safe System ① 9001 BR Station 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂ Intrinsically Safe System ①

① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an intrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous area to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used. ➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. 1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used. 2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. ◆ 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules other than the transformer type. ◆ 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures. ➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators. For ◆: Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.

KA54 KA55

Make

Volts 120 240

Amps

VA

10.00 5.00

1200 1200 Make

Volts Amps 115

AC NEMA Type C300 ➃ Break

0.50

Amps

VA

1.000 120 0.500 120 DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄ Break

VA 58

Amps

VA

0.50

58

Continuous Carrying Amps 3.0 3.0 Continuous Carrying Amps 3.0

The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA. ➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor. ➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.

Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4X Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmosphere, for which the equipment has been tested. Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details. These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates. Operating Nominal Lens Voltage Type Current Color Range V max. = 32 V I max. = 165 mA

20-30 V AC/DC

25 mA

Red Green Yellow

KP44R KP44G KP44Y

152 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XDP Heavy Duty Monolever

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page General Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Type XDP•••••C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Type XDP•••••C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Type XDP•••••C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XDP Heavy Duty Monolever General Description The XDP exterior, heavy duty monolever was designed for aircraft unloading equipment, where exposure to severe environments and mechanical abuse are inevitable. These switches have been engineered to withstand adverse conditions such as smog, dust, high humidity and extreme temperatures experienced in an airport environment. The XDP is currently being used for aircraft unloading service in Alaska. Other applications include snow plow controls and cherry pickers. 4 Types of hand operations are offered: A 2-position monolever operator that operates 2 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

A 2-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. This is a “Z” cam operation; the lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary). The first contact actuates with 15° operator movement; the second contact actuates with an additional 90° movement of the operator while still in the 15° position. Both contacts are actuated with the second movement.

A 4-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

An 8-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. Movement to the north, south, east, or west positions activates a single contact. Movement to the NE, NW, SE, or SW activates two contacts. The lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

* Contacts on monolevers with Telemecanique blocks are stackable with up to 3 contacts in any position.

Specifications Electrical ratings

10 A resistive/inductive up to 15 Vdc ZB2 contacts NEMA A600, Q600

Housing

Main body: diecast ZAMAC 3 Contact mounting base: weather-resistant nylon Handle boot: polyester elastomer (extremely temperature resistant)

Operating temperature

-40 °F to +140 °F -40 °C to +60 °C

Mechanical/electrical life

In excess of 1 million actuations per direction at rated load

Enclosure

NEMA Type 4 (IP65) when installed in a suitable enclosure. Exposed components: • Unaffected by oil or grease • Ozone resistant • Does not age or crack with prolonged outdoor exposure

Mechanism

• Lever operated • Momentary action (spring return to center) • Panel mounted • Anti-rotational, mounts with 4 screws (not provided) • Mounting nuts remove from the rear, rounded bolt heads exposed on operator side • Withstands severe operator abuse

154 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XDP Heavy Duty Monolever Monolever switches with 1 NO ZB2 contact block (ZB2BE101) in each position (up to 3 stackable in any position). NC contacts available, consult factory. Description

Function

Catalog Number

2 positions 2 contacts

XDPA1010C1

2/4 positions 4 contacts

XDPB1111C1

4 positions 4 contacts

XDPC1411C1

8 positions 8 contacts

XDPD1111C1

4.44 113

.062 Neoprene 1.6 Gasket

2.56 Square 65

1.75 44

XDP****C1, C2, C3, C6, P1, P3 Monolever with “ZB2” type contact

File E164353 CCN NKCR

®

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

Monolever switches with micro-switch V3 contacts (NO/NC). Description

Function

Catalog Number

2 positions 2 contacts

XDPA5050C4

2/4 positions 4 contacts

XDPB5555C4

4 positions 4 contacts

XDPC5555C4

8 positions 8 contacts

XDPD5555C4

4.44 113

.062 Neoprene 1.6 Gasket

2.56 Square 65

2.06 52

0.39 10

3/16" Quick Connect Tab Terminals

Tolerance = ±0.06 in (1.5mm) XDP****C4 Monolever with V3 switches

File E164353 CCN NKCR2

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

Dual Dimensions:

Inches Millimeters

155 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide XDP Heavy Duty Monolever Monolever switches with Burgess sealed switch V3S9 contacts (NO/NC). Description

Function

Catalog Number

2 positions 2 contacts

XDPA5050C5

2/4 positions 4 contacts

XDPB5555C5

4 positions 4 contacts

XDPC5555C5

8 positions 8 contacts

XDPD5555C5

4.44 113

.062 Neoprene 1.6 Gasket

0.10 2.5

2.17 55

0.11 in (2.8mm) Quick Connect Tab Terminals XDP****C5 Monolever with sealed switches (V3S9)

Panel Mounting Dimensions

Dual Dimensions:

Inches

1.88 dia. 48

2.0 51

2.0 51

Millimeters

4 X 0.20 dia. 5

156 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type BW, SKYP & XACA Pendant Stations Class 9001

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Type BW General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Type BW Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Type BW Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Seriplex Control Bus Version 2, Material Pull Pendant Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Type XACA Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Type XACA Standard Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Type XACA Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Type XACA Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Type XACA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Type XACA Exploded Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Type XACA Lamps and Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Type XACA Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Type XACA Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Type SKYP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Type SKYP Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Type SK Operators, Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Type SKYP Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Type SKYP Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations General Information

Type BW Standard Duty Pendant Stations The Class 9001 Type BW Pendant Station is a pre-assembled, 2 button station well suited for standard hoist applications. Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make it easy to grip and operate.

Features and Options • Made of high impact thermoplastic with self-extinguishing flammability rating (UL 94V) • NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Watertight, Dusttight, Oiltight, Corrosion Resistant • UL Listed and CSA Approved • 1/2" conduit opening • Internal strain relief post • Momentary contact • Maintained contact • Single speed • Two speed • With or without mechanical interlock • Optional external hanger bracket and seal • Ribs on top of enclosure prevent hanger bracket from rotating and coming loose • Contoured for easy grip • Easy to hold with one hand

• • •

Interchangeable legend inserts Field installable mushroom button Full cover gasket to exclude harmful contaminants

Off and Stop are White Letters on a Red Background • •

Jumper included on all single speed buttons (except universal types), saves wiring time Self-lifting pressure wire connectors for easy wiring

158 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations Specifications

Specifications Electrical ratings

AC - NEMA B600

Enclosure type

NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, and 4X

DC - NEMA P600

Operating temperature

- 25 °C to + 60 °C - 13 °F to + 140 °F

Housing material

Polycarbonate/PET Polyester Blend

Storage temperature

- 40 °C to + 70 °C - 40 °F to + 158 °F

Cable entry

1/2 inch NPT

Approvals File E42259 CCN NKCR

File LR 25490 Class 3211 03

Marking

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.

Electrical Contact Ratings (BW70’S AND BW80’S) AC – NEMA B600 Resistive 75% Power Factor

Inductive 35% Power Factor Volts ▲

Make Amps

120 240 480 600

30.0 15.0 7.5 0.6

Break VA 3600 3600 3600 3600

Amps 3.0 1.5 0.75 0.6

VA

Continuous Carrying Amperes

Make, Break and Continuous Carrying Amperes

360 360 360 360

5 5 5 5

5 5 5 5

DC – NEMA P600 Inductive and Resistive Volts

Make and Break Amperes

Continuous Carrying Amperes

120 240 600

1.10 0.55 0.20

5 5 5

▲ OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.

Approximate Dimensions 2.19 56

1.09 28

0.43 11

2.94 75 1.06 27

0.91 23

1 - 14 2 NPT

0.25 0.50 Mtg. Slot 4.69 119

Type BW70B through Type BW82Y Dual Dimensions:

Inches mm

159 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations Application Data and Order Information

The Class 9001 BW70 and BW80 pendant stations are used for hoist applications, requiring either single speed or two speed buttons. The thermoplastic enclosure is provided with a 1/2 inch conduit entrance at top to accept a pendant cable and has internal strain relief provided as standard. The stations are rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 4X. The enclosure is available in three colors. All universal stations have double circuit blocks (1 N.O. — 1 N.C.) on each button and come without legends so they can be assembled to fit the application. For convenience, push buttons have interchangeable legend inserts. The complete line is UL listed and C.S.A. certified. No. of Units

Legend Insert Markings

Description

Single Speed 2

Two Speed

Mechanical Interlock

Enclosure Color Yellow

Black

Replacement Interior

Contact Symbol

Red

9001 Type

Contact Symbol

Up-Down

Yes

BW72Y

BW72B

BW72R

146

BOC368

146

Forward-Reverse

Yes

BW73Y

BW73B

BW73R

146

BOC368

146 147

On-Off ▲

Yes

BW74Y

BW74B

BW74R

10

BOC358

Start-Stop

No

BW75Y

BW75B

BW75R

145

BOC359

25

Start-Stop ▲

Yes

BW76Y

BW76B

BW76R

10

BOC358

147

On-Off

No

BW77Y

BW77B

BW77R

146

BOC359

25

On-Off

No

BW79Y

BW79B

BW79R

145

BOC359

25

Up-Down

Yes

BW78Y

BW78B

.....

100

...

....

W/O Legend Inserts

Yes

BW70YU

BW70BU

BW70RU

25

BOC366

25

W/O Legend Inserts

No

BW71YU

BW71BU

BW71RU

25

BOC359

25

W/O Legend Inserts ▲

Yes

BW74YU

BW74BU

BW74RU

147

BOC358

147

W/O Legend Inserts

Yes

BW80YU

BW80BU

BW80RU

150

BOC367

150

Up-Down

Yes

BW82Y

BW82B

BW82R

150

BOC367

150

▲ Maintained contact

Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts

Marking

Start Stop Forward Reverse Open Close Raise Lower Up Down

For NEMA Type 4X Type BW70’s and BW80’s

Mushroom Button Inserts For NEMA Type 4X Type BW70’s and BW80’s

Type

Type

B259 B260 B255 B256 B263 B264 B261 B262 B253 B254

B282 B283 B278 B279 B286 B287 B284 B285 B276 B277

Marking

On Off Hand Auto BlankBlack BlankRed

Hanger Bracket and Seal Kit

For NEMA Type 4X Type BW70’s and BW80’s

Mushroom Button Inserts For NEMA Type 4X Type BW70’s and BW80's

Type

Type

B257 B258 B265 B266

B280 B281 B288 B289

B251

B251

B252

B252

Type B350

Contact Symbol

Speed 1

10 25

Speed 2

100

Speed 1

Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10. Speed 2

Legend Insert Kit – Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below Type No. of kit. Where Used:

For NEMA Type 4X Type BW70’s and BW80

Type Push Button

B250 (includes 1 each of B253 through B266)

Mushroom Button

B300 (includes 1 each of B276 through B289)

145

150

147

146 File E42259

File

LR 25490

CCN NKCR

Class 3211 03

Marking

Replacement Enclosures 9001BW70’S and 9001BW80’S

Hanger Bracket Form

Description

Yellow

Red

Black

Box

3110113201

3110113202

3110113203

Cover

3110114750

3110114751

3110114752

Screws not included. Order quantity 4 of a 21930-14281 for the screws.

Y236

Mushroom Button (less button insert) – For NEMA Type 4X, BW70 and BW80 Color

Type

Red

B303

For Dimensions ..................................................................................... Page 159 Addition of External hanger bracket (similar to the one used on Class 9001 Type SKYP Pendant Stations). Use when polymeric cord connectors are required.

160 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2 Material Pull Pendant Station

The Material Pull Pendant Stations provide an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus and a single input push button operator enclosed in a pendant station. Single-bit bus interface circuitry is used in this unit. If multiplexed operation is used by the CPU interface card, the pendant is scanned every frame. This pendant is not capable of being multiplexed (See page 9 for details). Features • Durable enclosure rated NEMA Type 12. • Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power supply or additional power conductors. • Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater system flexibility. • Mini-style quick-change connectors provide for easy pendant installation and change out. • LED indicators provided on the SERIPLEX module show power-on status, input status and output status – a convenient installation and troubleshooting aid. About Material Pull Systems A SERIPLEX Material Pull Pendant is used to control the floor stock of parts being installed during a final assembly operation. Typically, as an assembly worker uses parts they monitor the stock of material being used. When stock falls to a predetermined level, the assembly worker pushes the button on the Material Pull Pendant and a signal is sent to the computer requesting parts for that specific assembly operation. The illuminated push button in the pendant flashes to indicate the location where the parts are needed and a lift truck driver is dispatched with the parts. The lift truck driver presses the pendant push button to indicate that the parts have been delivered and to reset the system.

Dimensions (SPXBWPEND5 only) 3.12 (79.2)

in. (mm)

5.50 (140)

4.65 (118)

2.20 (55.9)

4.10 (104)

Pendant connector receptacle: Torque nut to 23 - 27 lb-in. Pendant enclosure screws: Torque screws to 15 lb-in. Operator ring nut: Torque 6 - 8 lb-ft.

Note: Gasket must be in place to maintain enclosure rating.

Replacement Parts Part Number

Description

SPXLEDA1

LED Lamp - Amber

9001B350

BW Pendant Hanger Bracket

9001A31

Push button Lens - Amber

SPXHH2P2CABLE

Hand-Held Set-Up Tool Adapter Cable for 5-Pin Mini-style Connectors

Internal Wiring to SERIPLEX Module Input address B (N.O.)

Catalog Number

Input Type Address A

Input Type Address B

Output Type Address B

Description

SPX BWPEND5

—

N.O.

LED Lamp Amber

Pendant enclosure, single illuminated push button, bus powered amber LED lamp, 5-pin mini-style quick change connector

9001 AEQ3370

—

N.O.

LED Indicator - Red

Pendant enclosure, single nonilluminated push button, red LED indicating lamp inserted in bottom of pendant, 5-pin mini-style quick change connector

white (data) blue (clock) red (V+)

Electrical Specifications Voltage: 24 Vdc Capacitance: 75 pF (typical) Max Current: 20 mA Pin 1 Shield Drain

black (common) orange (shield drain) Module LED Indicators

OB

Pin 5 Data Line

Pin 2 V+ DC Bus Power

Pin 4 Clock Line

Pin 3 Extended Pin Bus Common

P

IB

LED IB P OB

Male Receptacle Pin-out

Color yellow green yellow

Function and Address Input B Active Bus Power Applied Output B Active

For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.

161 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Specifications

XAC pendant stations are designed for standard or medium duty control circuit applications. The enclosures are made from rugged, double insulated thermoplastic material. These stations have been designed for easy handling and operation, even with heavy work gloves. Two styles of stations are offered; “small hoist” pistol grip stations with integral parts (see page 163), and "general purpose" station components with modular assembly required. The general purpose components are available as custom factory assembled stations. For custom applications, a wide range of operators, contact blocks, legend plates and accessories are offered. Features

Applications

• 1 and 2 speed versions

• Overhead cranes

• Double insulated

• Tower cranes

• Shock and corrosion resistant

• Fixed hoists

• 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions

• Beam hoists

• Ease of operation

Specifications Electrical ratings

NEMA A600, Q600

Enclosure

XACAO*

NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor/Outdoor), 5 IP 65

XACAO* (Pistol grip)

NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor), 5 IP 65

Operating temperatures

-15 °C to +70 °C -5 °F to +158 °F

Housing

Yellow polypropylene

Storage temperatures

-40 °C to +70 °C -40 °F to +158 °F

Shock resistance

100 g

Vibration resistance

15 g for f = 40 to 500 Hz

Mechanical life

1 million operations (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)

Operating force

XACA Multi-element types -with contact ZB2BE: 1 daN (36 oz.) for 1N.O., 1.3 daN (46.8 oz.) for 1N.O./1N.C. -with contact XENG1491: 1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1N.C./2N.O. -with contact XENG1191: 1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1st step, 2.5 daN (89.9 oz.) for 2nd step

Cable entry

XACD - 7 to 18 mm All other models - 8 to 26 mm

Cabling

Screw and captive cable clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 in lbs. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm2 (20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm 2 (16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or by cable quick connector conforming to NF C 20- 20 (on request). File E164353 CCN NKCR

Approvals

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

Marking

XACA08 (Shown with optional operators and accessories)

162 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Standard Duty

Pistol grip stations Description

Function 1 Speed / 2 Speed

Speeds

Catalog Number

1 N.O. contact per operator 2 Mechanically interlocked operators

1

XACA201q

2 N.O. (staggered) contacts per operator 2 Mechanically interlocked operators

2

XACA207q

1 N.O. + 1 N.C. 2 Mechanically interlocked operators

1

XACA205q

1 N.O. contact per direction 1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle

1

XACD21A0101

1 N.O. + N.O. staggered 1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle

2

XACD21A1231

1 N.O. & 1 N.C. contact per direction 1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle

1

XACD21A0105

1 N.C. + 1 N.O. + 1 N.O. staggered 1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle

2

XACD21A1241

XACA2013

q These XACD units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a “Trigger Action” E-stop.

General purpose pendantst

XACA06

Enclosures

Catalog Number

2 hole enclosure

XACA02

3 hole enclosure

XACA03

4 hole enclosure

XACA04

6 hole enclosure

XACA06

8 hole enclosure

XACA08

12 hole enclosure

XACA12

t Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.

Contact Blocks For Operators In Cover Description

XACA03 (Shown with optional operator)

Wiring Diagram

Catalog Number

1 N.O./spring return/1 speed

–

ZB2BE101

1 N.C./spring return/1 speed

–

ZB2BE102

Fig. 1

XENG1191

1 N.O. early close & 1N.C.&1N.O./spring return/2 speed 1 N.C. & 2 N.O./spring return/1 speed

Fig. 2

XENG1491

1 N.O. & 1 N.O. latching/1 speed/interlocked

Fig. 3

XENG3781

1 N.O. & 1 N.C. latching/1 speed/interlocked

Fig. 4

XENG3791

For operators in base of enclosure j 1 N.O./1 speed

XACS101

1 N.C./1 speed

XACS102

2 N.O./1 speed

XACS103

2 N.C./1 speed

XACS104

1 N.O. & 1 N.C./1 speed

XACS105

j Cannot be used with XACA03 pendant.

ZB2BE10●

XENG37●1

Wiring diagrams

13

14

13

14

21

22

21

22

33

34

13

Fig. 1

XENG1191

33

14

13

14

13

14

11

12

34

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

XACS10●

163 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Operators and Accessories

Operators▲ Description

Color White

Booted push button Booted push button

Description

Mushroom head

Mushroom Size

Mushroom head, momentary Mushroom head, momentary Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release

Selector switch

Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release (trigger action) ❋ Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release (trigger action) ❋

30 mm 40 mm 30 mm

XACA9411

Black

XACA9412

Green

XACA9413

Red

XACA9414

Yellow

XACA9415

Blue

XACA9416

Brown

XACA9419

Color

Catalog Number

Black

ZA2BC24

Red

ZA2BC44

Black

ZA2BC2

Red

ZA2BC4

Red

ZA2BS44

40 mm

Red

ZA2BS54

30 mm

Red

ZA2BS834

40 mm

Red

ZA2BS844

30 mm

Red

ZA2BS74

40 mm

Red

ZA2BS14

40 mm

Red

Description

Selector switch (key operated)

Catalog Number

Color

ZA2BS844 Catalog Number

Selector switch/2 position - maintained❋❋

Black

ZA2BD2

Selector switch/3 position - maintained❋❋

Black

ZA2BD3

Selector switch/2 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position ❋❋

NA

ZA2BG4

Selector switch/3 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position ❋❋

NA

ZA2BG5

Black

ZA2BB2

Red

ZA2BB4

Wobble stick (bottom mounting recommended)

Pilot light components Description

Wobble stick

Color

ZB2BV006

Resistor supply base/with 130 V lamp (for 220-240 V applications) (AC/DC)

ZB2BV007 Green

Pilot light operators for incandescent lamps

XACB961

Catalog Number

Direct supply base/without lamp (for 6 to 120 V applications) (AC/DC)

XACA971 Pilot light operators for LED lamps ▲ ❋ ❋❋

ZA2BV03

Red

ZA2BV04

Amber

ZA2BV05

Blue

ZA2BV06

Clear

ZA2BV07

Green

ZA2BV033

Red

ZA2BV043

Amber

ZA2BV053

Booted push buttons are for cover mounting only. All other operators can be mounted on cover or bottom. Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator. Not for use with XEN G contact blocks.

Enclosure Accessories Description

XACA982

Catalog Number

Blank hole plug

ZB2SZ3

Mechanical interlock (momentary). For use with XAC booted operators only

XACA009

Adapter for self-supporting cable

XACB961

Low suspension ring for single row station

XACA971

Protective guard for bottom mounted mushroom head

XACA982

Protective guard for bottom mounted selector switch or key switch

XACA983

XACA983

164 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Exploded Drawing

XAC-B961 XEN-T1192

XAC-A941●

ZA2-BC4

XEN-G1● 91

ZA2-BC44

XEN-G37 ●1 XAC-A009

ZA2-BS54

ZB2-BE ● ● ●

ZA2-BS44

ZA2-BS14 ZB2-BY● ● ● ●

XAC-S ● ● ● ZB2-BV00 ●

ZA2-BS74

ZB2-BY ● ● ● ●

ZA2-BD ●

ZA2-BG ●

XAC-A982 XAC-A971 ZA2-BD ●

ZA2-BB ●

XAC-A983

ZA2-BV0 ●

ZA2-BG ●

ZA2-BC ● ● BS ● ●

ZB2-SZ3

30075-16

165 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Lamps and Legend Plates Lamps Type

Voltage (AC/DC) 6 12 24 48 130 120 220 380

Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s) Incandescent

DL1CE0** (Incandescent)

Neon (use with direct supply light module) Type

Color Green Red Amber Green Red Amber Green Red Amber Green Red Amber

LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks

DL1CJUS**** (LED)

Watts 1.2 2.0 2.0 2.4 2.6 Voltage 6 volt ac/dc 6 volt ac/dc 6 volt ac/dc 12 volt ac/dc 12 volt ac/dc 12 volt ac/dc 24 volt ac/dc 24 volt ac/dc 24 volt ac/dc 120 volt ac/dc 120 volt ac/dc 120 volt ac/dc

Catalog Number DL1CB006 DL1CE012 DL1CE024 DL1 CE048 DL1CE130 NE51HRT120V NE51HRT220V NE51HRT380V Part Number DL1CJUS0063 DL1CJUS0064 DL1CJUS0065 DL1CJUS0123 DL1CJUS0124 DL1CJUS0125 DL1CJUS0243 DL1CJUS0244 DL1CJUS0245 DL1CJUS1203 DL1CJUS1204 DL1CJUS1205

PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40mm Texta Bridge Forward Bridge Reverse Close Down Emergency Stop Fast Forward For Rev For-O-Rev Hand Off Auto High High Low Hoist Down Hoist Up In Inch Jog For Jog Rev Jog Run Left Low Lower Man Auto

Catalog number ZB2BY2343 ZB2BY2344 ZB2BY2314 ZB2BY2308 ZB2BY2330 ZB2BY2328 ZB2BY2305 ZB2BY23 ZB2BY2384 ZB2BY2387 ZB2BY2338 ZB2BY2369 ZB2BY2342 ZB2BY2341 ZB2BY2503 ZB2BY2321 ZB2BY2381 ZB2BY2380 ZB2BY2365 ZB2BY2310 ZB2BY2336 ZB2BY2337 ZB2BY2372

Text a Off On Off On Open Open Close Open-O-Close Out Power On Raise Reset Reverse Right Run Slow Start Stop Stop Start Trolley Right Trolley Left Up Up Down Up-O-Down

Catalog number ZB2BY2312 ZB2BY2311 ZB2BY2367 ZB2BY2313 ZB2BY2376 ZB2BY2388 ZB2BY2339 ZB2BY2326 ZB2BY2335 ZB2BY2323 ZB2BY2306 ZB2BY2309 ZB2BY2334 ZB2BY2327 ZB2BY2303 ZB2BY2304 ZB2BY2366 ZB2BY2345 ZB2BY2346 ZB2BY2307 ZB2BY2370 ZB2BY2389

a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering. For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2. Type PVC blank legend

PVC custom engraved

Blank Blank Special engravingj Special engravingj Special engravingj Special engravingj

Description Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm

Catalog number ZB2BY2101 ZB2BY4101 ZB2BY2002 ZB2BY2004 ZB2BY4001 ZB2BY4005

j Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.

166 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Order Form

XACA Order guide instructions Custom built pendant stations 1.

The first step in putting together your pendant station is to determine the number of operators that you require. This enables you to choose the enclosure based on the number of holes needed.

2.

Select the type of operator, contact block and appropriate nameplate for each function required from pages 163-166. Enter the components for each function on the order form below.

3.

Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting cab le, lower

support rings, protective guards etc.

TO BE COMPLETED BY SQUARE D Name

TO BE COMPLETED BY CUSTOMER

Branch/Sales office

Firm

Delivery date

Date

Sheet No.

14 Date

Order No.

No. of identical units required Functions (optional)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Unit reference of enclosure Mechanical interlock (draw a line between the 2 units to be interlocked★)

Cust. Order No.

Delivery date

XACA

Legends

Contact blocks and pilot light bodies

push button pilot light or blanking plug

1

2

3

4

5

13 6

15

7

8

16 9

10

17

11

12

* Mechanical interlock

1

1

1

2

2

3 4

3 4

★ Mechanical interlock XACA009

Number of XAC A009 required

Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards) 13

2 3 4 5

5

5

6

6

6

Possible combinations

Impossible combinations

Attachments Cross the appropriate box if required

Position

Type

14

Adapters for self supporting cable type BBAP (only available with 8 to 26 mm dia. cable sleeve)

XACB961

15

Lower support ring

XACA971

16

Protective guard for base mounted selector switch or 40 mm emergency stop push button

XACA982

17

Protective guard for key switch

XACA983

Photocopy this form and complete all information. 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Catalog No.

167

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XACA — Pendant Stations Dimensions

General purpose type XACA ●●●● General purpose type

Small hoist type XACA201 Small hoist typeand A205 XAC A201 and A205

XAC A••••

Internal dia. 9 to 13 mm

Internal dia. 8 to 10 mm 11 to 14 mm 15 to 17 mm 18 to 22 mm

8.5 216

10.87 276

22 to 26 mm

1.9 48

A

1.66 42

1.97 50

B

2.36 60

Small hoist XACD XACD Small Hoist inner dia. 7 to 9 mm 10 to 12 13 to 15 16 to 18

8 mm dia.

2.75 70 3.55 90 11.83 300.5

3.15 80

1.3 33

9.45 240

XAC A982

.35 8

1.1 28

3.15 80

XAC A983

3.97 101

3.23 82

.79 20

3.58 91

2.25 57

XAC A971

3.15 80

No. of Holes IN/mm A B

2 IN

3 mm

IN

4 mm

IN

6 mm

IN

8 mm

IN

12 mm

IN

mm

15.00 380 15.00 380 17.33 440 19.70 500 22.10 560 26.78 680 7.50 190

7.50 190

9.85 250 12.20 310 14.57 370 19.30 490

168 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations Specifications

Specifications Electrical ratings

Types SKRU2 - SKRU5: AC - Nema B300 DC - Nema P600 Types SKRU1, 10, 11: AC - Nema A600: DC - Nema P600

Enclosure type

UL Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 13

Operating temperature

- 30 °C to + 60 °C - 13 °F to + 140 °F

Housing material

Polycarbonate

Storage temperature

- 40 °C to + 70 °C - 40 °F to + 158 °F

Cable entry

1/2 inch NPT

Approvals File E42259 CCN NKCR

File LR 25490 Class 3211 03

Marking

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.

Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU2 Through SKRU5)❋ AC – NEMA Type B300 Inductive 35% Power Factor Volts▲

120 240

Make

Resistive 75% Power Factor

Amps

VA

Amps

Break VA

Continuous Carrying Amperes

Make, Break and Continuous Carrying Amperes

30 15

3600 3600

3 1.5

360 360

5 5

5 5

Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU1, 10 and 11)❋ AC – NEMA Type A600

DC - Standard Duty - NEMA P600

Inductive 35% Power Factor Volts❋

120 240 480 600 ▲

Inductive and Resistive

Resistive 75% Power Factor

Make Amperes

Break Amperes

Continuous Carrying Amperes

Make, Break and Continuous Carrying Amperes

60 30 15 12

6 3 1.5 1.2

10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10

Volts

120 240 600

Make and Break Amperes

Continuous Carrying Amperes

1.1 0.55 0.2

10 10 10

OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.

169 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations Application Data and Order Information This line of pendant stations consists of polymeric enclosures (2 through 10 units), push button units (1 through 5 speed) and laminated legend plates. All enclosures have an extra single unit space near the top which permits the installation of a toggle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light ➁ or a warning label. All enclosures come with a stainless steel hanger bracket and internal strain relief post, as standard. Enclosures are yellow and have a threaded opening in the top. The complete line is UL Listed and CSA Certified with NEMA Type environmental ratings 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13.

LIFETIME ENCLOSURE WARRANTY

Enclosures Enclosure For Assembled Station●

Size

Conduit Entrance Size

Enclosure Only▲ Type

Type

2 Button 4 Button 6 Button 8 Button 10 Button

3/ "-14 NPT 4 3/ "-14 NPT 4 1"-111/2 NPT 1 1 /4"-111/2 NPT 11/4"-111/2 NPT

SKYP2 SKYP4 SKYP6 SKYP8 SKYP10

SKYP20 SKYP40 SKYP60 SKYP80 SKYP100

Class 9001 SK push-to-test pilot lights and remote test pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures. ● Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators and legend plates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components - there is no charge for assembly. All custom orders must include the pendant key sheet available as shown on page 173. Threaded conduit hole ▲

Legend Plates

Hanger bracket (Part no. 6509101801)

Where Used Space for toggle switch, a type SK operator or pilot light. Use appropriate legend plates.

For SKRU1 through SKRU11

With Toggle Switch➀ in Top Space of Enclosure

Blank Off-On On-Off Specify Marking

SKN500 ➂ SKN544 ➂ SKN545 ➂ SKN599 ➂

Type SKN2 legend plate

Push Button Units Number of Buttons Per Unit

Type ✻

7

SKRU1

5

SKRU10

2

Single Speed – Momentary Interlocked Single Speed – Momentary Non-Interlocked Single Speed – Maintained Interlock

10

SKRU11

2

Two Speed – Momentary Interlocked

87

SKRU2

2

Three Speed – Momentary Interlocked

88

SKRU3

2

Four Speed – Momentary Interlocked

89

SKRU4

2

Five Speed – Momentary Interlocked

90

SKRU5

2 2

✻

Description

Contact Symbol – See Below

Type SKN200➄ SKN201 SKN202 SKN203 SKN204 SKN205 SKN206 SKN207 SKN208 SKN209 SKN210 SKN211 SKN299➄

Type SKYP enclosure Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Any Type SK pilot light▲ or operator can be mounted in this enclosure. The enclosure depth will accommodate 1 Type KA1 thru KA6 (total of 2) contact blocks.

Marking Blank-Blank Hoist: Up-Down Trolley: East-West Trolley: Fwd.-Rev. Trolley: North-South Bridge: Fwd.-Rev. Bridge: East-West Bridge: North-South Start-Stop Reset-Stop Aux Hoist: Up-Down Power: On-Off Specify Marking

Blank SKN100 ➃ On SKN103 Off SKN104 Emerg. Stop SKN105 Run SKN124 Power On SKN138 Off-On SKN144 Specify Marking SKN199 ➃ ➀ Can be supplied by Square D as Class 9001 Type SKSTS1- includes boot for NEMA Type 4X. ➁ See Class 9001 Type SK on page 171. ➂ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch. ➃ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core. ➄ 19 characters each side max. With Type SK Operator or Pilot Light➁ in Top Space of Enclosure

Closing Plate Type

Types SKRU 1, 10 and 11 use Type KA contact blocks. Types SKRU 2 thru 5 are factory enclosed contact blocks.

SK52

Multispeed Contact Symbols (“X”= Contact Closed) SPEED POSITION OFF 1 2

2 1 Terminals C

Terminals C

1 2

Terminals

SPEED POSITION OFF 1 2 3

3 2 1

Single Speed Contact Symbols Terminals

C

C

1

1

1

2

2

2

2868-D30 3

87

3

7

2868-D29

5

10

88

Terminals C

SPEED POSITION OFF 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4

Terminals C

1

1

2

2

3

3

Terminals C

SPEED POSITION OFF 1 2 3 4 5

5 4 3 2 1

Terminals C

Dimensions ........................................................................................... Page 172 Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Pendant ........................................... Page 173

1

1

2

2 3

3

4

4

5

5

4

4 2868-D31

89

2868-D32

90

170 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type SK — Operators Application Data and Order Information

Non-illuminated Description

Color

Catalog

2 Position

Red

SKR9R

Maintained Pull

Red (1)

Maintained Push

Color

(2) Other Color Codes

Black

B▲

Red

R

Green

G

SKR9R05

(2)

SKR9 (2)

(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob. See note (3) below for additional options.

Blue

L

Yellow

Y

White

W▲

Orange

S

Clear

C

Amber

A

▲ These colors are not available on illuminated push buttons.

Contact Blocks (3) Illuminated Description Description

Color

Voltage

2 Position

Red

120 Vac/dc - Full Voltage

Symbol

Catalog

Catalog SKR9P58R KA1

Maintained Pull

Red (1)

24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage

SKR9P55R05

Maintained Push

(2)

24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage

SKR9P55 (2)

(Clear Cover)

KA3

(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob. See note (3) below for additional options. (Red Cover)

Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type SK Control Units Both N.C. contacts are direct opening. • UL listed and CSA certified • LED light modules use lamp with 7 element LED cluster that provides illumination similar to incandescent illumination. • LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.

Voltage

Description

For Use With Single Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➀

Light Module Type No.

Voltage Assembly Code

Rating

24-28 Vac-dc 24-28 Vac-dc 24-28 Vac-dc 24-28 Vac-dc 110-120 Vac-dc 110-120 Vac-dc 110-120 Vac-dc 110-120 Vac-dc

Full Voltage LED Red LED Green LED Yellow Full Voltage LED Red LED Green LED Yellow

All All All All All All All All

KM55 KM55LR KM55LG KM55LY KM58 KM58LR KM58LG KM58LY

55 55LR 55LG 55LY 58 58LR 58LG 58LY

1.2 VA 0.5 VA 0.5 VA 0.5 VA 3.0 VA 0.5 VA 0.5 VA 0.5 VA

Replacement Lamps Lamp Number Lamp Part (ANSI) Number 757 2550101002 6508805204 6508805206 6508805205 120MB 2550101027 6508805204 6508805206 6508805205

➀ 9001 SK

Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G AC

DC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor Volts

120 240 480 600

Make

Break

Amperes

VA

Amperes

VA

Continuous Carrying Amperes

60 30 15 12

7200 7200 7200 7200

6.0 3.0 1.5 1.2

720 720 720 720

10 10 10 10

Resistive 75% Power Factor Make, Break and Continuous Amperes 10 10 10 10

Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600) Volts

125 250 600

Make and Break KA1

KA2 KA3

KA4

KA5 KA6

Continuous Carrying Amperes

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 0.55 0.2

1.1 – –

1.1 0.55 0.2

10 10 10

(3) For additional Type SK push button operators (illuminated and non-illuminated), light modules, and contact blocks, see document 9001CT9601: 30mm Push Buttons Type K and SK. All illuminated push button operators must use a shallow depth light module listed above. Only standard pilot lights and non-illuminated selector switches can be used in Type SKYP enclosures.

171 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions “A” Dimensions Units

Inches

Conduit Opening mm

NPT

2

11.70

297

3/

4

16.03

407

3/

6

20.36

517

1” -11 1/2

8

24.69

627

11/4” -111/2

10

29.02

737

11/4” -111/2

4” -14 4” -14

Type SKYP Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot Lights and Remote Test Pilot Lights will not fit in these enclosures. Standard Pilot Lights will fit in these enclosures. For illuminated operators, in the SKYP, the shallow depth light module (9001KM55 or 9001KM58) must be used.

"A"

2.15

See Chart for NPT Size

3.19 81

54.48

2.32 59

4.38 111

2.12 54 4.79 122

4.33 110

7.37 187

4.00 102

2.68 68

D65075-140B

3.49 89

3.31 84

Dual Dimensions:

Inches Millimeters

2.04 52 3.50 89

Type SKYP

Type SKYP

172 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations Order Form

KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE SKYP ASSEMBLED PENDANT CONTROL STATIONS

Control Products

CUSTOMER

CUSTOMER ORDER NO.

DATE

LIST PRICE EACH, DIB

QUANTITY

Class

Operator or Closing Plate. Example - SKRU1

2.

Legend Plate Type Number Example - SKN201

3.

Legend Plate Marking ▲ – Used Only if Special Marking is Required Example: Line 2 - SKN299 Line 3 - A.) Hoist B.) FWD C.) REV

A

2 Button

3/

4” -14

NPT

SKYP20

3/

4” -14 NPT

SKYP40

6 Button

1” -14 NPT

SKYP60

8 Button

11/4” -11 1/2

SKYP80

10 Button

11/4” -11 1/2

SKYP100

Where Used

Contact Symbol

Type

SKRU1

2

Single Speed - Momentary Interlocked

7

2

Single Speed - Momentary Non-Interlocked

5

SKRU10

2

Single Speed - Maintained Interlocked

10

SKRU11

2

Two Speed - Momentary Interlocked

87

SKRU2

2

Three Speed - Momentary Interlocked

88

SKRU3

2

Four Speed - Momentary Interlocked

89

SKRU4

2

Five Speed - Momentary Interlocked

90

SKRU5

Type SK52

3

A) B) C)

1

3

Marking

Type

Blank-Blank Hoist: Up-Down Trolley: East-West Trolley: Fwd.-Rev. Trolley: North-South Bridge: Fwd.-Rev. Bridge: East-West Bridge: North-South Start-Stop Reset-Stop Specify Marking

SKN200➃ SKN201 SKN202 SKN203 SKN204 SKN205 SKN206 SKN207 SKN208 SKN209 SKN299➃

With Toggle Switch ➀ in Top Space of Enclosure

Blank Off-On On-Off Specify Marking

SKN500 ➁ SKN544 ➁ SKN545 ➁ SKN599 ➁

With Type SK Operator ▲ or Pilot Light in Top Space of Enclosure

Blank On Off Emerg. Stop Run Power On Off-On Specify Marking Specify Marking (Red Background)

SKN100 ➂ SKN103 SKN104 SKN105 SKN124 SKN138 SKN144 SKN199 ➂ SKN199R ➂

For SKRU1 through SKRU11

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B)

LEGEND PLATES – NEMA 4X, 13

PUSH BUTTON UNITS – NEMA 4X, 13

CLOSING PLATE

2

Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Type SKN2 legend plate

▲ Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators, and legend plates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components – there is no charge for assembly.

Description

1

2

Type

4 Button

3

Hanger bracket Threaded conduit hole Space for toggle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light or a warning label. Use SKN5 or SKN1 legend plates. Type SKYP enclosure

Enclosure for Assembled Station ▲

Conduit Entrance Size

2

1 SKRU1 2 SKN201 3

C

SKYP -________ Space for toggle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light, or a warning label. Use SKN-5 or SKN-1 legend plates.

1

1 SKRU1 2 SKN201 3

B

ENCLOSURES – NEMA 4X, 13

Number of Buttons per Unit

Type

TYPE NUMBER KEY When operator and legend plate use 2 adjacent holes - specify same in both locations. Example:

1.

Size

9001

C)

1 2 3

Type SKRU1 through SKRU 11 operators or Type SK operators and Type SKN-2 legend plate.

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B) C)

1 2 3

A) B) C)

➀ Can be supplied by Square D as 9001SKSTS1 ➁ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch.

➂ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core. ➃ 19 characters each sides. ▲ Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot lights and Remote Test Pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.

1 2 3

A) B) C)

173 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

174 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA Indicating Banks and Beacons

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 181-182 XVAL Single Stage Indicating Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 XVAC Indicating Bank Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Prewired Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 LED Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179-180 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181-182

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons General Description

The XVA indicating bank is an illuminated stackable modular system of signaling lights that can be used for indicating the status of a machine and verifying that status from a distance and in all directions (360°). The modular system of lenses allows the unit to be constructed from any combination of 1 to 5 lenses. Constant, flashing and strobe units are available. Examples: Indicates machine shutdown, shortage of materials, paging of supervisor or maintenance personnel, hazardous or dangerous conditions to name a few. It is a perfect solution for status indication on factory floors utilizing JIT methods. Machines, instrument panels and work stations equipped with the XVA allow personnel to react more quickly to any situation or incident.

Some industries that currently use or could use XVAs: Automotives OEMs Electronics Garment Pharmaceuticals Publishing Textiles Agriculture

• • • • • • • •

One complete single stage beacon or components consisting of 1 to 5 lenses forming an indicating bank. Five colors to select from: green, red, orange, blue and clear. Signal can be continuous, flashing or strobe. Visible from a distance and on a 360° radius. Shock and vibration resistant. One common base for 1-5 lenses, only one cable entry required. Aluminum tubes of 4 in. (100 mm), 16 in. (400 mm), and 31.5 in. (800 mm) lengths for extension of column. Audible signal available

Protective treatment

Standard version, treatment TC “all climates”

Ambient temperature

Storage: -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) Operating: -13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)

Degree of protection

Approval per UL508. Meets NEMA Type 1 and 12 protection, IEC Type IP54

Material

Cover and lenses: polycarbonate Base: Polyamide Tube: Anodized aluminum Gasket: Neoprene

Mounting •

Canning Test Equipment Computer Industry Food Processing Robotics Semiconductor Machine Tool

• • •

Two screws affix base when units are direct mounted or four screws used for tube and tulip mounted. The tube and base of column mount directly on the tulip. All wiring done into saddle clamp screws in the base. See page 181 for wiring diagram. Lenses stack on one another by use of a captive screw through the lens.

Specifications

Typical applications for the XVA include: Conveyor Systems Machine Tools Printing Presses Retro-fit Assembly Lines Textile Looms

Specifications

Industrial Baking Ovens Automated Paint Booths Automated Test Equipment Just-In-Time Manufacturing Automated Manufacturing Lines Assembly Work Stations

Rated insulation voltage 250 V

File E164353 CCN NKCR

Approvals

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03 and Class 3211 07

Marking

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226

Lamps

5 W minimum, 7W maximum, length: 1.61" (41 mm) for DL1BA●●● 1.93" (49 mm) for DL1BL●●●

Terminal marking

Terminal marked “O” common to 5 elements and ground

Wiring

Captive terminal with screw saddle clamp, minimum capacity:2 size #18 AWG series maximum capacity: 2 size #12 AWG series

176 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVAL — Indicating Banks and Beacons Single Stage Indicating Beacon

Indicating Beacons Description

Signal Steady light lamp type BA15d (not supplied) ≤ 240 Vac/dc

Standard flashing light lamp type BA15d (not supplied) 24 V - 240 Vac only (± 10%)

XVAL471 (One circuit only)

(1) XVAC211 Base + cover

Complete assembly comprising: 1 cover 1 illuminated lens unit 1 base

Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 24 Vdc, 260 mA max.

Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 110-120 Vac, 110 mA 50-60 Hz

XVAC09 Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 220 Vac (± 10%), 80 mA 50-60 Hz

XVAC01 XVAC11

Color

XVAL331

Red

XVAL341

Orange

XVAL351

Blue

XVAL361

Clear

XVAL371

Green

XVAL431

Red

XVAL441

Orange

XVAL451

Blue

XVAL461

Clear

XVAL471

Green

XVAL73C024

Red

XVAL74C024

Orange

XVAL75C024

Blue

XVAL76C024

Clear

XVAL77C024

Green

XVAL73B120

Red

XVAL74B120

Orange

XVAL75B120

Blue

XVAL76B120

Clear

XVAL77B120

Green

XVAL73A220

Red

XVAL74A220

Orange

XVAL75A220

Blue

XVAL76A220

Clear

XVAL77A220

Accessories and spare parts for indicating beacons and banks Type

XVAC02, 027 XVAC03, 037 XVAC04, 047

Accessories for tube mounting

DL1B●●●●

Gaskets for use at point of mounting

Size/ Type Voltage

Catalog Number

4" metal tubes

100 mm

XVAC02

16" metal tubes

400 mm

XVAC03

31.5" metal tubes

800 mm

XVAC04

4" black anodized metal tubes

100 mm

XVAC027

16" black anodized metal tubes

400 mm

XVAC037

31.5" black anodized metal tubes

800 mm

XVAC047

1/2" NPT conduit adaptor

Metallic

XVAC00

Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized

Plastic

XVAC01

Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized

Metallic

XVAC11

Wall mounting bracket

Metallic

XVAC12

For direct base mounting

XVAC05

For tube support/mounting plate

XVAC06

For between lenses, base, cover - replacement

XVACO5

Catalog Number

Green

XVAC06

XVAC09

AC or DC

Lamps type BA15d

Length

XVAC12

49 mm (BL) 41 mm (BA)

2.5 W

12 V

DL1BA012

4W

24 V

DL1BA024

6.5 W

24 V

DL1BL024

4W

48 V

DL1BA048

7W

110 V

DL1BA110

7W

120 V

DL1BL120

5W

160 V

DL1BA160

6W

260 V

DL1BA260

For Additional Lamps see LED Lamps on page 179 and 180.

177 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVAC — Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Bank Components

(Components for variable composition) Description Lens unit sub assembly

Signal Steady light lamp type BA15d (not supplied) ≤ 240 Vac/dc

(1) XVAC94

Standard flashing light lamp type BA15d (not supplied) 24 V to 240 Vac only (± 10%)

+ (1) XVAC341 Lens unit sub assembly with strobe light (only 1 strobe may be used on each bank and must be mounted in the top position).

+ (1) XVAC331

+

+

Audible sounder sub assembly (90 db. at 1 meter, 3KHz)

(1) XVAC11

+ (1) XVAC06

+

XVAC331

Red

XVAC341

Orange

XVAC351

Blue

XVAC361

Clear

XVAC371

Green

XVAC431

Red

XVAC441

Orange

XVAC451

Blue

XVAC461 XVAC471

Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 24 Vdc, 260 mA max. common negative (for common positive, take off digit 1 at the end of the reference. ▲

Green

XVAC73C0241

Red

XVAC74C0241

Orange

XVAC75C0241

Blue

XVAC76C0241

Clear

XVAC77C0241

Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 110-120 Vac, 110 mA, 50-60 Hz

Green

XVAC73B120

Strobe light (integral discharge tube) 220 Vac (± 10%), 80 mA 50-60 Hz

(1) XVAC027

Green

Clear

(1) XVAC211 Base + cover

+

Catalog Number

Color

Continuous tone

(for common positive remove digit 1 at the end Intermittent tone of the reference Example: XVAC91)

Red

XVAC74B120

Orange

XVAC75B120

Blue

XVAC76B120

Clear

XVAC77B120

Green

XVAC73A220

Red

XVAC74A220

Orange

XVAC75A220

Blue

XVAC76A220

Clear

XVAC77A220

12 to 48Vdc, 13 mA max. common negative

XVAC911

110 to 220 Vac, 3.3 mA

XVAC93

12 to 48 Vdc 13 mA max. common negative

XVAC921

110 to 220 Vac, 3.1 mA

XVAC94

Cover and one to five unit base

XVAC211

Cover only

XVAC081

Base only

XVAC07

Indicating banks are supplied as sub-assemblies, individually referenced and boxed, for assembly by the user. Maximum number of units: 5, including 1 (max.) top mounted strobe. See page 177 for Accessories and Spare Parts. ▲ Example: XVAC73C024

(3) DL1BL120

Pre-Wired Bases (1)

=

1 example of a complete indicating bank

Wire Gauge

Standard Wire (2)

#14 AWG (3)

XVAC211S5

#16 AWG

XVAC211S1

#18 AWG

XVAC211S10

#22 AWG

XVAC211S11

(1) Common and ground wires are provided with all of the above options. (2) Standard wire provides 2 feet of wire as standard length. (3) #14 AWG wire cannot be used with tube support/fixing plates (XVAC01 or XVAC11)and wall mounting bracket (XVAC12).

178 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons LED Cluster Lamps How to choose between the standard incandescent bulb and the LED cluster lamp Use standard incandescent bulb when desiring:

Use upgraded LED cluster lamp when desiring: extended lamp life (industry average for an LED is approx. 100,000 hrs.) - lamp is normally ON ● resistance to vibration (e.g. direct machine mounting, conveyor mount, etc.) ● to avoid machine and/or process downtime due to changing lamp, or if process is complicated to reset ● lower power consumption ● long range cost savings (see table below)

average operating life ≤ 2,000 hours a universal bulb – each bulb can be used with any color lens – Bipolar (e.g. 120 V bulb can be used with either 120 Vac or 120 Vdc) ● low initial bulb cost for short term cost savings ● bulb is normally OFF

●

●

●

Product Cost Comparison Lamp Type

Average Life (approximate)

Miscellaneous

Incandescent

~ 2,000 hours

+ Low initial cost + Many color options + AC or DC power - Generates heat - Prone to shock and vibration damage

• Maximum brightness

+ Extremely long life + Resistant to shock/vibration + Cool operation + Low power consumption

LED Color Brightest Red Orange Yellow Green Least bright Blue

~ 100,000 hours (11.4 years) LED

“LED Industry Average” (~50 times life of incandescent)

Illumination

Cost Savings (over 11 years) $5 List Price/bulb x 50 ▲ ($30 cost/P.O.) (2 P.O.'s/yr.) (11yr.) ■ ($5/bulb change) (50 bulb changes)

= 250.00 = 660.00 = 250.00 —————

This price does not include cost of machine or process downtime.

$

$150 List Price/LED lamp x 1 ▲ ($30 cost/P.O.) (1 P.O.) ■ ($5/lamp change) (1 lamp installation)

1,160.00

= 150.00 = 30.00 = 5.00 —————

This price does not include savings from reduced power consumption.

$

185.00

▲ Average P.O. costs $25 - $50 to process; assume bulbs ordered twice each year. ■ Assume maintenance worker rate of approximately $20/hr. or $5/15 minutes to change bulb.

NEW LAMP/LENS COMBINATION

FREE LENS!

LED Lamp & Lens Assemblies Color ▲ (Lamp/Lens)

Voltage

Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers

Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers ●

Indicating Banks and Beacons

Indicating Banks and Beacons

Green/Green

XVACD331B120

XVACD431B120

Red/Red

XVACD341B120

XVACD441B120

Orange/Orange

XVACD351B120

XVACD451B120

Yellow/Yellow ■

120 VAC

XVACD381B120

XVACD481B120

Yellow/Clear ▼

XVACD371B120

XVACD471B120

Lens

▲ Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases. ● The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens. ■ Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banks and beacons) with XVAD381B120 (steady light) or XVAD481B120 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components. ▼ Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock). Color ▲ (Lamp/Lens)

Voltage

Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers

Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers ●

Indicating Banks and Beacons

Indicating Banks and Beacons

Green/Green

XVACD331C024

XVACD431C024

Red/Red

XVACD341C024

XVACD441C024

XVACD351C024

XVACD451C024

Orange/Orange

24 VAC/DC

Yellow/Yellow ■

XVACD381C024

XVACD481C024

Yellow/Clear ▼

XVACD371C024

XVACD471C024

Lamp

▲ Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases. ● The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens. ■ Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banks and beacons) with XVAD381C024 (steady light) or XVAD481C024 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components. ▼ Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).

179 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons LED Cluster Lamps

LED Cluster Lamp Selections ▲ Color

No twisting or turning–insert straight in and click.

LED Cluster Lamp

File E164353 CCN NKCR2

File LR 44087 Class 3211 03

Steady Unit

(Recommended Lens Color)

Voltage

Current

Flashing Unit

LED Catalog No.

Current

● LED Catalog No.

Red

120 Vac

25 mA

XVAD341B120

25 mA

XVAD441B120

(Red)

24 V AC/DC

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD341C024

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD441C024

Orange

120 Vac

25 mA

XVAD351B120

25 mA

XVAD451B120

(Orange)

24 V AC/DC

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD351C024

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD451C024

Green

120 Vac

25 mA

XVAD331B120

25 mA

XVAD431B120

(Green)

24 V AC/DC

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD331C024

AC: 80 mA DC: 95 mA

XVAD4312C024

Yellow

120 Vac

25 mA

XVAD381B120

25 mA

XVAD481B120

24 V AC: 80 mA AC: 80 mA XVAD381C024 XVAD481C024 AC/DC DC: 95 mA DC: 95 mA ▲ These LEDs will not fit in XVA flashing lenses (i.e. XVAC4••) nor in steady lenses manufactured with date codes before 9221 (21st week of 1992 Example of date code before this date would be 9210, 9138, etc.). LEDs will fit into lenses with a two letter date code, e.g. MA, CB, etc. ● The flashing circuitry is in the LED, not the lens. *Yellow lens is not UL listed. Note: The LEDs have a separate negotiation category from the standard XVA Line. (Yellow or Clear)

Product Capabilities Our new XVA LED Cluster Lamp has passed (and even surpassed) exhaustive testing to ensure the highest level of quality. The following are a few of those tests: Reliability — predicted minimum mean time between failure (MTBF) of 200,000 hours. Vibration Resistant — passed the following standard tests: IEC68-2-6: Cycling from 10 Hz to 55 Hz for 5 minutes, and holding at resonance on 55 Hz for 30 minutes. Low Power Consumption — Approximately 40% less power dissipation than the incandescent lamp. Current Regulated — Illumination will not vary in intensity from 85% to 120% of rated voltage. Leakage Current — Device will not illuminate with leakage current up to 3 mA. UL Recognized, CSA Certified, with CE Marking Noise Immunity — Meets requirements of IEC801. Passed the following standard tests: IEC801-2: Electro-static discharge IEC801-4: Fast transient burst IEC801-5: Line-to-line surge withstand IEC801-5: Line-to-ground surge withstand Shock Resistant — Passed the following standard test: IEC68-2-27 (30 g, for 11 ms, 1/2 sine wave). Shipping Test — Passed National Safe Transit Committee Project 1A Test Thermal Cycling Test — Passed 35 cycles from -25 °C to 75 °C (one cycle = -25 °C to +75 °C to -25 °C in 1 hr.) Salt Spray Test — Passed (96 hours). Test = 96 hours of direct spray. Immune to interference from portable communication devices. Storage Temperature -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to + 158 °F) Operating Temperature -25 °C to + 55 °C (-13 °F to + 158 °F)

180 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons Dimensions

Indicating beacon, 1 stage Tube length

2.7 69

4.2 107

4.2 107

b

dia. .98 25

mm

in.

3.9

100

7.3

186

2.5

mm 63

15.7

400

19.1

486

14.3

363

31.5

800

34.9

886

30.0

763

Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81mm) to total stack height.

b =

in.

Cabling (base viewed from above) 3rd unit

b1

1.65 42 dia. 2.7 69

mm

2nd unit

4th unit

1st unit

5th unit

.63 16

=

b1

in.

=

2.12 54

=

Indicating bank Column 1 to 5 stages

Common**

Mounting with tube

dia. 2.67 68

** “—” pole to “common” terminal

1

2

1.57 40

b

b2

b2

No. of lenses

1.65 42

=

3

dia. .98 25

.63 16

dia. 2.7 69

b1

=

=

2.12 54 dia. 2.67 68

4

Tube length

b

b1

b2

in.

mm

in.

mm

in.

mm

in.

3.9

100

7.3

186

2.5

63

4.2

mm 107

15.7

400

19.1

486

14.3

363

4.2

107

31.5

800

34.9

886

30.0

763

4.2

107

3.9

100

9.25

238

2.5

63

6.25

159

15.7

400

21.2

538

14.3

363

6.25

159

31.5

800

36.9

938

30.0

763

6.25

159

3.9

100

11.4

290

2.5

63

8.3

211

15.7

400

23.2

590

14.3

363

8.3

211

31.5

800

39.0

990

30.0

763

8.3

211

3.9

100

13.4

342

2.5

63

10.3

263

15.7

400

25.3

642

14.3

363

10.3

263

31.5

800

41.0

1042

30.0

763

10.3

263

=

Mounting with tube

5

3.9

100

15.5

394

2.5

63

12.4

315

15.7

400

27.3

694

14.3

363

12.4

315

31.5

800

43.0

1094

30.0

363

12.4

315

Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81 mm) to total stack height.

Dual Dimensions:

Inches mm

Wiring Diagram L1

L2 0 (+) 1 2 3 4 5

181 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons Dimensions

Baseplate 1

Wall Mount Side 4.50 114.3

0.19 5

0.22 5.5

r=

0.17 4.32

0.39 10

0.40 10.5

0.90 22.86

0.53 13.5

65° 30°

0.05 1.27

2.04 51.82

0.059 r= 1.5

0.13 3.30

0.98 25 0.53 13.5

0.28 7.11 2.20 55.88

0.39 10 0.95 24

Inches millimeters

0.059 r= 1.5 40°

Inches millimeters

Wall Mount Bottom 2.68 68

Lite Tube

Dia.(Qty.3) 0.23 5.84

1.20 30.5

0.055 1.4 0.055 1.4

0.30 7.62 0.91 23

0.70 17.8

0.53 13.5 1.50 38

0.20 5.08

0.46 11.68

2.04 51.82

1.46 37

0.14 3.56

4.02 102

0.20 5.08

Dia. 0.15 3.81

0.047 @ 45° 1.2 0.43 11

Tubing and Thread Dimensions Wall Mounting Bracket To be Drawn

M23 x 2

Wall Mount Front 2.68 68

0.50 12.7

0.26 6.60

0.59 15

0.55 13.97 1.50 38 0.76 19.30

Drilling and tapping of support

0.76 19.30 Dia. (Qty. 2) 0.17 4.32

Dia. (Qty. 4) 0.20 5.08

1.33 43

Dia. 0.90 22.86 4.50 114.3

2.12 54

1.57 40

2.12 54

0.17 4.32

2 size M4 screws (dia. 4)

1.65 42

2 size M5 screws (dia. 5)

182 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Class 9003

CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 2, 3 and 4 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 5, 6 and 7 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 8, 9 and 10 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Type K Instrument Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Type K Rotary Cam Switch Operators and Handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Accessories and Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Type K Rotary Cam Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Type K Rotary Cam Switch Markings and Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch The Class 9003 Type K2 rotary cam switch is a versatile means of providing inexpensive logic control. The Class 9003 Type K cam switch is available with: • Up to 12 switching positions • Worldwide acceptance • Attractive operator/handle appearance • Up to 20 contacts • Standard or custom configured sequences A complete rotary cam switch consists of up to four items. This includes the contact block assembly, the operator/handle, a legend (if desired), and any special accessories (if required). A. There are two ways of ordering a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch contact block assembly. 1. If the desired contact sequence can be found on pages 185 through 189, order the class and type of the device. 2. If the contact sequence cannot be found on pages 185 through 189, use the keysheet on pages 193 through 195. Indicate the exact contact configuration desired. Devices will be assembled at the factory per this keysheet. B. Operators/handles are listed on pages 190 and 191. The operator/handle is chosen depending on the application and size of the rotary cam switch. C. Many operators/handles come standard with a blank legend plate. Separate legends for operators without blank legend plates or when an additional legend is desired are listed on page 192. Page 194 contains a chart on the maximum characters allowed on all legend plates. D. All accessories are listed on page 192. Example – Below is an explanation of the Contact Sequence/Wiring Diagrams found on pages 185 through 189. 1 6 1. Vertical arrow indicates contact status at 0° (up) handle position. 2. Terminal identification, terminals 1 and 2 are one contact. 3. Contact 3-4 is closed between 2nd and 4th position. The “H” indicates that the contact does not open while switching from one position to another. 4. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 4 and 5. 5. Jumpers installed by factory between terminals 2 and 4, 6 and 12, 8 and 10. 6. Horizontal arrow indicates spring return to previous position. 7. Contact 1-2 is open in third position. 8. Contact 1-2 is closed in second position. 9. A “1” in adjacent boxes does not assure that the contact remains closed while switching between adjacent positions. 10. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 3 to position 4. This contact is not closed at position 3 or at position 4.

2

2

1 3 5 7 9 11

8

7

3 4

4 9 10

2 4 6 8 10 12

5

5 5

Only an example! – Contact your local Square D Sales Office for conditions on

Spring Return and Jumper options and pricing. Contact Ratings The following contact rating charts are to be used in properly sizing a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch to a particular application. The UL ratings chart below reflects the ratings to UL specifications. The UL file is E164864. The Class 9003 Type K2 is UL Listed per guide NLRV. The Class 9003 Type K3 through KA9 are UL component recognized per guide NLRV2. The lower chart is contact ratings per German specification VDE 0660. The CSA file is LR 44087, Class 3211 03 or Class 3211 05. UL Ratings Contact Block Assembly

Maximum V

General Purpose A

K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9

300 120 600 600 600 600 600 600

12 20 25 32 45 63 110 195

110V120V HP 0.5 0.75 2 2 – – – –

Horsepower 1 PH - 2 pole 60 Hz 200V220V440V208V 240V 480V HP HP HP 1 1 – – – – 3 3 7.5 3 5 10 – – – – – – – – – – – –

550V600V HP – – 7.5 15 – – – –

Horsepower 3 PH - 3 pole 60 Hz 200V220V440V208V 240V 480V HP HP HP 2 3 – – – – 5 7.5 15 7.5 10 20 15 15 30 15 20 40 25 25 60 30 30 75

110V120V HP 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 15

550V600V HP – – 20 25 40 50 60 75

X

X X X X X X X X

X X X X

Electrical Ratings (VDE 0660) Rated Cur- Continuous Current Ith2 rent Shaft as DiLoad Con- menBreak tact sions Switch Block In EnIa Free closed AIr

K2

c

In Free Air Utilization Category AC1 Ie

c mm

A

A

A

A

6

20

20

16

16

K3

6

32

32

25

32

K4

8

63

63

50

40

K5

8

63

63

50

40

K6

8

80

80

63

63

K7

8

100

100

80

80

K8

8

160

160

125

125

K9

8

250

250

200

200

Rated Operational Current Ie

Utilization Category AC1

Utilization Category AC2 and AC3

Utilization Category AC3 and AC3

Operational Voltages

1 PH

Rated InsuMain 240 V 415 V 500 V lation Switches Volt220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220V 415 V 500 V 660 V age kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A A A V V A A A A 4 4 4 6 10.5 14 14 4.5 7.5 2.2 1.3 2.2 2.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4 3 2 660 500 8.5 8.5 6.5 5 4.3 7.5 7.5 7.5 2.5 4.3 6.5 11 12 21 27.5 27.5 7 12 11 11 6 4 3 660 500 15 15.5 12 9 5.5 11 11 11 15 26 34 34 14 24 20.5 – – 8.5 15 15 15 12 8 6 660 500 22 22 13 8.5 15 15 15 15 26 34 34 14 24 – 12.5 22 22 22 – – – 660 500 29 30 23 17.5 – 11 20 20 20 24 41.5 54 54 17.5 30 – – 17 30 30 30 – – – 660 500 39 40 30.5 23 17 30 30 30 30 52.5 69 69 22 38 – – 26 45 45 45 – – – 660 660 59 57 44 33 24 45 45 45 48 83 108 108 35 61 81.5 – – 32 55 55 55 – – – 660 660 85 65 49 34 60 60 60 75 130 170 170 55 95 115 114 85 – – – – – – – – – 660 660 65 3 PH 3 Pole

1 PH 2 Pole

Rated Operation Current Ie Utilization Category AC11

3 PH 3 Pole

1 PH 2 Pole

For Y q-Starters

Emergency Stop Switch V

V

660

500

660

500

660

500

660

500

660

500

660

660

660

660

660

660

All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.

184 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Emergency Main Switch

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192. 2 and 3 Contacts 4 Contacts Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

1 3

45°

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3

2 4

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

1 3 5

1 3 5

2 4 6

2 4 6

2 4 6

Panel Mountingt Type

Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

K2B001S

45°

K2B001UA

45°

K2B002A K3B002A K4B002A K5B002A K6B002A K7B002A K8B002A K9B002A

45°

2 4

1 3

Switching Angle

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

Switching Angle

Panel Mountingt Type

45°

K2D002S

45°

K2D002UA

45°

K2D003LA

45°

K2D004A K3D004A K4D004A K5D004A K6D004A K7D004A K8D004A K9D004A

45°

K2D004GA

45°

K2D004NA

45°

K2D004QA

30°

K2D005T

30°

K2D012GA

45°

K2D012NA

45°

K2D012QA

K2B002GA

45°

K2B002NA

45°

K2B002QA

45°

K2B003T

45°

K2B004T

45°

K2B006T

45°

K22C002LA

45°

K2C003A K3C003A K4C003A K5C003A K6C003A K7C003A K8C003A K9C003A

45°

K2C003GA

45°

K2C003NA

45°

K2C003QA

45°

K2C007T

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

2 4 6 8

t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190

185 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192. 6 And 7 Contacts 5 and 6 Contacts Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9 11

1 3 5 7 9 11

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11

12

45°

K2E005A K3E005A K4E005A K5E005A K6E005A K7E005A K8E005A K9E005A

45°

45°

45°

2 4 6 8 10 12

2 4 6 8 10 12

45°

45°

Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

Type

45°

45°

2 4 6 8 10 12

Panel Mountingt

K2E003WA K3E003W K4E003W K5E003W K6E003W K7E003W K8E003W

45°

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9 11

1 3 5 7 9 11

Switching Angle

1 3 5 7 9 11

K2F003SA

K2F003UA K3F003U K4F003U K5F003U K6F003U K7F003U K8F003U K9F003U

t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190

2 4 6 8 10

11

12

2 4 6 8 10 12

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11

12

1 3 5 7 9 11

K2F006A K3F006A K4F006A K5F006A K6F006A K7F006A K8F006A K9F006A

K2F006QA

1 3 5 7 9

1 3 5 7 9 11

K2E005QA

K2F006NA

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9 11

K2E005NA

Switching Angle

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11

12

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11 13

12 14

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11 13

12 14

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11

12

13

14

Panel Mountingt Type

45°

K2F013GA

45°

K2F013NA

45°

K2F013QA

60°

K2F013UA K3F013U K4F013U K5F013U K6F013U K7F013U K8F013U K9F013U

45°

K2F022GA

45°

K2F022NA

45°

K2F022QA

45°

K2G007NA

45°

K2G007QA

45°

K2G007A K3G007A K4G007A K5G007A K6G007A K7G007A K8G007A

186 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192. 9 and 10 Contacts 8 Contacts Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

Switching Angle

45°

45°

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11 13 15

12 14 16

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11 13 15

12 14 16

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

45°

30°

Panel Mountingt

K2H004UA K3H004UA K4H004UA K5H004UA K6H004UA K7H004UA K8H004UA

2 4 6 8 10

11 13 15 17

12 14 16 18

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

11 13 15 17

12 14 16 18

Panel Mountingt Type

30°

K2I009NA

30°

K2I009QA

45°

K2I023GA

45°

K2I023NA

45°

K2I023QA

45°

K2K005SA

K2H008NA

K2H008QA

K2H014GA

45°

K2H014NA

45°

Switching Angle

1 3 5 7 9

K2H004S

45°

45°

Contact Sequence Wiring Diagram

Type

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15 17

10 12 14 16 18

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15 17

10 12 14 16 18

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15 17

10 12 14 16 18

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15 17 19

10 12 14 16 18 20

K2H014QA

K2H032NA

t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15

10 12 14 16

45°

K2H032QA

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190

187 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequences and jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter. A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192. Type

Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators.

K2D023M

KBF1C 4-13

K2D024M

KBF1C 4-10

K2D1049M

KBF1C 4-534

K4D1049M

KBF2F4-534

VOLTMETER For reading 1 phase to neutral and 3 phase to phase voltages with off position

K2E025M

KBF1C 4-11

VOLTMETER For reading 3 phase to phase voltages of two different supplies with off position

K2H026M

KBF1C 4-12

K2F1050M

KBF1C 4-14 or KBF1C 4-535

K4F1050M

KBF2F4-535

K2D1047M

KBF1C 4-536

K4D1047M

KBF2F4-536

Description

VOLTMETER For reading 3 phase to neutral voltages with off position

VOLTMETER For reading 3 phase to phase voltages with off position

VOLTMETER For reading 3 phase to phase and 3 phase to neutral voltages of one supply with off position

Wiring Diagram

Contact Sequence

AMMETER For reading the amperage on three lines using 2 CT's with off position

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190

188 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequences and jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter. A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192. Typet

Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators.

AMMETER/VOLTMETER Reads 3 current transformers and 3 phase to neutral voltages. Without off position.

K2K1014M

KBF1C 9-14

AMMETER/VOLTMETER Reads 3 current transformers and 3 phase to phase voltages. Without off position.

K2K1021M

KBF1C 9-14

K2F003M

KBF1C 9-4

K2F1051M

KBF1C 4-536

K4F1051M

KBF2F4-536

AMMETER Reads 3 current transformers without off position.

K2F013M

KBF1C 9-14

AMMETER Reads 4 current transformers with with off position.

K2H004M

KBF1C 6-2

AMMETER Reads 4 current transformers without off position.

K2H014M

KBF1C 9-5

Description

AMMETER Reads 3 current transformers with off position.

Wiring Diagram

Contact Sequence

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136 Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-142

189 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches. These are single hole mounting, and are mounted in a 22mm (7/8 inch) diameter mounting hole. All meet protection category IP-65. Description

Style

Black Bezel Black Knob

Chrome Bezel Black Knob

Yellow Bezel Red Knob

Knob

KAB1A

KBB1A

--

Keyt

KAB1S

KBB1S

--

Knob

KAA1A

KBA1A

--

Keyt

KAA1S

KBA1S

--

Knob

KAA2B

KBA2B

KCA2L

Keyt

KAA2S

KBA2S

--

Knob

KAC1B

KBC1B

KCC1L

Keyt

KAC1S

KBC1S

--

Knob

KAD1C

KBD1C

KCD1M

Keyt

KAD1S

KBD1S

--

Dimensions q mm

Bezel – Small square similar to 9001D1 and D2 operators. Does not include blank legend plate.

Bezel – Small round similar to 9001D3 and D4 operators. Does not include blank legend plate.

Bezel – Large round. Does not include blank legend plate.

Bezel – 45 x 45 mm. Includes blank legend plate.

Bezel – 60 x 60 mm. Includes blank legend plate.

t Key withdrawal codes. When ordering a Key operator for a contact block assembly, the switching angle of the contact block assembly must first be known. From the chart at right, choose the appropriate suffix for the desired switching angle. This suffix is added to the end of the operator/handle's type number. Example: 45° switching for 9003KAB1S KAB1S16 Note: Key is removable in all positions. Replacement Key is Class 9001Z18.

Angle

Code

30° 45° 60° 90°

Not Available 16 1 6

The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions. Description

For Size K2-K3 Bezel – 60 x 60 mm Mounting – 22 mm (7/8 inch)

Black Bezel Black Knob

Yellow Bezel Red Knob

KAD1X

KCD1Y

Dimensions mm q

Marked 9-30 (see page 195). No other markings available.

q All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192 Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195

190 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switch. They are suitable for panel mounting or base mounting of contact block assemblies. See description below for proper sizing of operators/ handles and contact block assemblies. These operators provide protection category IP-40. See page 192 for gaskets. Black Legend Black Knob

Chrome Legend Black Knob

Yellow Legend Red Knob

For size K2-K3 Bezel 45 x 45 mm

KAE1B

KBE1B

KCE1L

For size K2-K3 Bezel 60 x 60 mm

KAF1C

KBF1C

KCF1M

For size K4-K6 Bezel 60 x 60 mm

KAF2F

KBF2F

KCF2R

KAG2G

KBG2G

KCG2T

KAG2H

KBG2H

KCG2U

Description

Includes blank bezel legend

Dimensions mm a

Mounting

For size K7-K9 Bezel 90 x 90 mm

Includes blank bezel legend plate

The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions. Black Operator Black Knob

Yellow Operator Red Knob

For size K2-K3 Bezel 60 x 60 mm

KAF1X

KCF1Y

For size K4-K6 Bezel 60 x 60 mm

KAF2X

KCF2Y

KAG2X

KCG2Y

Description

Dimensions mm a

Mounting

For size K4-K9 Bezel 90 x 90 mm

Marked 9-30 (see page 195) No other markings available. a All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184 Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192

191 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Description

Type

Description

Number of Contacts

Shrouds

Type

For large round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operators

For K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 12 16 20

KZ35 KZ36 KZ37 KZ38 KZ39

Holder with blank legend Blank legend only

9001 01V

For K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8

KZ53 KZ54

Empty holder only

KZ34

For K4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6

KZ58 KZ59

For K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6

KZ59 KZ75

For K7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6

KZ60 KZ61

For K8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6

KZ61 KZ63

For K9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

KZ64

Ring Nut Wrench – for use with all operators/handles listed on page 190.

KZ33

Additional legend for 45 x 45 mm bezel operators. See page 190 to determine size of operator. Holder with blank legend

KZ13

Blank legend only

KZ76

Empty holder only

KZ14

Additional legend for 60 x 60 mm bezel operators. See pages 190-191 to determine size of operator.

9001Z01

Holder with blank legend

KZ15

Blank legend only

KZ77

Empty holder only

KZ16

Blank legend plate bezel inserts Gasket used with operators/handles listed on page 191 to provide IP-65 protection – for panel mounting contact block assemblies. 45 x 45 mm

KZ65

60 x 60 mm

KZ66

90 x 90 mm

KZ67

For small square bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator. Holder with blank legend

900101Q

Blank legend only

900101W

Empty holder only

9001Z15

900101R

Blank legend only

900101W

Empty holder only

9001Z16

Replacement ring nut for all operators/ handles listed on page 190.

Color Black Silver Yellow

KZ17 KZ18 KZ19

60 x 60 60 x 60 60 x 60

Black Silver Yellow

KZ20 KZ21 KZ22

90 x 90 90 x 90 90 x 90

Black Silver Yellow

KZ23 KZ24 KZ25

Description Replacement Knobs for K2-K3 Operators

For small round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator. Holder with blank legend

Size 45 x 45 45 x 45 45 x 45

Handle Codet

Color

Length (d)

Type

A B C D L M N

Black Black Black Black Red Red Red

29 mm 34 mm 42 mm 57 mm 34 mm 42 mm 57 mm

KZ26 KZ27 KZ28 KZ29 KZ41 KZ42 KZ43

F G H R T U

Black Black Black Red Red Red

42 mm 57 mm 116 mm 42 mm 57 mm 116 mm

KZ44 KZ46 KZ48 KZ45 KZ47 KZ49

Replacement Knobs K4-K9 Operators

KZ30 t

Last letter of the “operator/handle” type number is the “handle code.”

192 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Instructions

Explanation Of Example Below

1. Choose the chart below with the switching angle as determined on the key sheet. This identifies the angular location and the position numbers for the various positions of the rotary cam switch. Zero degrees or straight up is always position 1. Use these position numbers when completing the target table on page 194. 2. Terminals on the cam switch have the same numbers as the terminal numbers on the target table. Contact 1-2 is a single contact. 3. WHEN INDICATING A CONTACT CLOSURE, PLACE “X” WITHIN THE SQUARE AS SHOWN IN THE CONTACT SEQUENCE EXAMPLE AT RIGHT.

1. Contact 1-2 is open in all positions but position 2. 2. Contact 3-4 is closed from the 2nd through the 4th position. The contact does not open while switching from one position to another. 3. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 2 and 3. 4. Contact 9-10 is closed in positions 2 and 3. It is open momentarily while switching between positions 2 and 3. 5. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 2 to position 3. This contact is not closed in position 2 or position 3. 6. Position 1 is an off position. POSITIONS

6. Based on the number of contacts, determine the price of the contact block assembly below. Prices of operators/handles, legend markings, and any accessories are listed on their respective page(s).

193 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Customer

F.O. NO.

Date

P.O. Number

Qty.

To order custom cam switches: 1. Indicate the contact size at right (9003K2-K9). Switching Angle

Maximum Number of Positions

See Ordering Instructions at left

90° 60° 45° 30°

4 6 8 12

2-3 4-5 6-7 8-12

2. Indicate desired switching angle at right. If the switching angle is not indicated, the factory will determine the angle from the recommended column of the table on right. 3. Per the example on page 193, fill in target table below. Contact size

4. Indicate operator/handle type. 5. If operator/handle bezel has legend and legend marking is desired, indicate legend marking on back of this form.

K____________

Class 9003

Type

Operator/Handle type

Class 9003

Type

______________

Separate legend

Class 9003

Type

______________

Switching angle

______________

6. If separate legend is required, indicate legend type on right and marking on back of this form. See page 184 for Target Table Explanation

TargetTable Target Table Positions Positions

1

T E R M I N A L S

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 31-32 33-34 35-36 37-38 39-40

194 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Standard Markings

Special Markings

The following legend markings are standard for the 45 x 45 mm and 60 x 60 mm bezel operators. To order one of these size bezel operators with a standard marking, add the code below of the desired marking as a suffix to the operator type number. Example: 9003 KBC1B 4-3.

All other legend engraving is considered special. To order, clearly indicate the position of the desired marking. See below for the maximum characters allowed on a specially engraved legend. Rectangular Legends

30° Marking

Legend Size

For Operator Size

Maximum # Characters Per Position

900101Q 900101R 900101W

26 x 19 mm

–

7

900101V 9003KZ33

37 x 22 mm

–

11

9003KZ11 9003KZ13 9003KZ76

42 x 13 mm

45 x 45 mm

12

9003KZ15 9003KZ77

57 x 27 mm

60 x 60 mm

17

Type 01

01 8

765

3-1

2 3 4

01 9 8

3-2

765

2 3 4

01 2 10 9 3 4 8 765

11 0 1 2 10 9 3 4 8 765

3-4

3-5

3-3

12

10 9

876

3-6

3 4 5

12 10 9

3-7

876

3 4 5

11 10 9

12 876

3-8

3 4 5

12 1 2 3 11 10 4 5 9 876

3-9

3-10

45° Marking 0

1

0

1 2

0

1 2 3

1 2 3

4

0 5

1 2 3

4

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

0

0

0

0

1

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

4-11 1

8 7 6

HAND AUTO

4-21 1

2

1

4-8 1

2 3 4

2 3 4

5

4-18

0

0

0

0

0

L1

MIN. MAX.

AUTO

4-38 2

1 2 3

1

4-51

6

5

2 3 4

1 7 6

4-19

L2 L3

4-44

OFF

2

1

4-10

4-54

5

2 3 4

L1-L2 L2-L3 L1-L3

Type

VOLTMETER

AMMETER

4-534

4-535

4-536

L2-N L3-N

4-55

4-56

60° Marking 1

0

2 4

6-1 0 1

HAND

AUTO

STOP

START

1 2

3

6-2

6-6

6-8

0

0

0

L1-L2

L1-L2

L2-N

L2-L3

L2-L3

L3-L1

L3-N

L3-L1

L3-L1

0

0 1

0

2

1

2

6-12

6-30

3

6-31

0 1

2

2

1

6-32

1

Legend Size

Maximum # Characters Per Position

KZ17 KAC1B KAE1B KAC1S

KZ18 KZ19 KBC1B KBE1B

KBC1S KCC1L KCE1L

45 x 45 mm

42 x 42 mm

3

KZ20 KAD1C KAF1C KAF2F KAD1S

KZ21 KZ22 KBD1C KBF1C KBF2F

KBD1S KCD1M KCF1M KCF2R

60 x 60 mm

57 x 57 mm

5

KZ23 KAG2G KAG2H

KZ24 KZ25 KBG2G

KBG2H KCG2T KCG2U

90 x 90 mm

87 x 87 mm

6

1 0

2

6-33

All dimensions in mm. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

0 3

2

6-34

L1-N

6-11

1

2

L1-L2 L2-L3

For Bezel Size

L1-N

2

VOLTMETER

Square Legends

4-20

3

4-59

AUTO

4-43

3-

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

1 2

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

4-9

4-17

AUTO

0

0 1

1

2 1.2

4-7 2 3

0

2

4-16

L1-N

4-58

1 2 3

4-15

2

4-57

4

4-14

4-34

3

7 6 5

3

1

1

2

L1-N L2-N L3-N

1 2 3

4

4-6

1

2

6 5

0

4-13 HAND

4-23

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

3

0

L1-N L2-N L3-N

4-12

2 3 4

5

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

1 2-3 1-2

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

OFF 1

L1-N

0

OFF 1

0

2

0

6-35

6-36

6-37

6-38

6-39

90° Marking 0

0 3

0

1 2

9-1

1 START

9-2

2

4 1

START START

9-3

L3

1

L1 L1

L4

L2

4

0 2

L2

L3

3

9-4

9-5

9-6

2

STOP

START

0

L1

1

1

L2 L3

9-7

9-10

9-14

9-30

Positions of engravable locations on blank legends. Rectangular Legends

Square Legends

t Maximum number of characters for these positions is one (1) less than the listed maximum in the chart above.

195 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch Panel Mount

Contact Block Assembly Depth Number of Contacts

K2 Length at mm

K3 Length at mm

K4, K5 Length at mm

K6 Length at mm

K7 Length at mm

K8 Length at mm

K9 Length at mm

1-2

52.5

50.5

58.5

64.5

3-4

62.5

63

74.5

86.5

67.5

77.5

120.5

86.5

106.5

5-6

72.5

76

90.5

108.5

192.5

105.5

135.5

264.5

7-8

82.5

89

106.5

130.5

124.5

164.5

–

9-10

92.5

102

122.5

152.5

143.5

193.5

–

11-12

102.5

115

138.5

174.5

162.5

222.5

–

13-14

112.5

15-16

122.5

17-18

132.5

19-20

142.5

t Dimension a for the 9003K2 is for 4 hole mounting operator/ handle. Add 18 mm to dimension a when using single hole mount operator/handles. With Shrouds

mm

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

b

48

54

85

85

85

111

111

180

c

26

27

40

40

40

50

50

88

Base Mount

The door interlock mounting radius is the length of the radius between the center of the mounting hole of the operator/handle and the pivot point (hinge) of the panel front.

196 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELISTM XBT Message Display and Terminal Products

CONTENTS Description ....................................................................................................... Page General Information ............................................................................................. 198 Features and Characteristics ............................................................................... 202 Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH ..................................................................... 204 Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP ................................................... 206 Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE .......................................... 208 Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM ................................................ 210 Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA ................................................... 212 Software and Accessories ................................................................................... 214 XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines ................................................................... 217 Compatibility Tables ............................................................................................. 218 XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility .................................................. 219 Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 220 Technical Documentation .................................................................................... 222 Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E ............................................................. 223 Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M ........................................... 224

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products

The MAGELiS XBT is a state-of-the-art industrial operator interface product line. It comprises three families—XBTH message displays, XBTP operator terminals, and XBTE operator terminals—designed for machine builders, panel makers, and end users. From a simple 2 x 20 character display to a 24 function key 4 x 40 character terminal, many flexible solutions are available to meet the customer's needs. MAGELiS XBT products have a unique design—combining good looks, ergonomics, and practicality— providing unsurpassed value in terms of price and performance. Windows software-based configuration software, simple page concept programming (messages and alarms), and downloadable communication protocols make the MAGELiS XBT an outstanding choice for globally accepted, low cost operator interfaces.

MAGELiS Operator Terminals ●

Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.

●

Maximize access to information through simple keypad prompting.

●

Allow customization of function keys and front panel.

●

Utilize downloadable protocols for ease of installation and support.

●

Provide LCD and fluorescent displays based on cost and performance needs.

MAGELiS Software ●

Allows design of effective operator messages, prompting, and data entry.

●

Provides simple WYSIWYG configuration tools, on-line help, and examples.

●

Benefits designer with integrated alarming and communication setup.

●

Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.

●

Maximizes development with multi-language support.

●

Compliments application training with on-line simulation.

MAGELiS XBT operator terminals meet the requirements of the European Machinery Directive for function keys, symbols, icons, alarm handling, and ability to structure information. MAGELiS XBT operator terminals carry the CE mark. European Machinery Directive: 89/655 EEC: Minimum Health and Safety Regulations for the Protection of Machine Operators. Low Voltage Equipment: IEC 947-1, General Electrical Requirements IEC 947-5, Control Equipment and Switching Devices Other relevant standards met:

IEC 1131, Programmable Controllers IEC 801, Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Control Equipment IEC 255, Electrical Relays IEC 529, Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures IEC 68, Environmental Testing

UL 508 : Type 4

CSA C22.2 No. 14 : Type 4

198 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products General Information Square D, Groupe Schneider is pleased to provide you a complete line of rugged message display terminals. This family of display terminals is available to meet a host of needs by establishing dialog and simplifying data exchanges between the programmable controller and the operator. With features ranging from simple message readouts to user-programmable function keys, operators may adjust machine parameters through direct communications. Some of the key features offered as a part of the XBT line are listed below. XBTs have been designed with the industrial environment in mind.

MAGELiS Message Displays, Terminals, and Configuration Software (XBTH, P, and E)

Refer to page 204

MAGELiS XBT industrial message displays and operator terminals are suitable to most any automation application. The product line can adapt to almost any control system environment—from nano to micro to larger PLC systems of varying brands. MAGELiS Message Displays: ●

XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.

●

XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.

●

Store up to 200 messages.

MAGELiS Operator Terminals: ●

XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.

●

XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.

●

Store up to 400 messages.

●

XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.

●

XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - LCD Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.

●

Store up to 800 messages.

MAGELiS Windows-based Configuration Software: ●

XBTL1000: Multilingual: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.

●

XBTL1***: Downloadable protocols: Modbus®, Uni-Telway, Siemens, etc.

This family of XBT products is configured through a single, Windows® software-based package, reducing your investment and installation costs.

Message Displays (XBTK, XBTM)

Refer to page 210

The XBTK and XBTM are Square D's single and two line display units. Display units establish one-way communication between the operator and the machine. Messages contain machine status or fault indication. ●

XBTK: 1-Line x 20 1/2-inch characters.

●

XBTM: 1-Line x 10 1-inch characters, 2-Line x 21 1/2-inch characters.

●

Store up to 600 messages.

Operator Terminals (XBTA)

Refer to page 212

The XBT-A operator terminal establishes two-way dialog between the operator and the machine for monitoring and adjusting system parameters. ●

1-line display of 16 characters.

●

8-12 Function Keys, 12 Edit Keys, 3 Service Keys.

●

Store up to 250 messages.

As you will see, Square D offers a full range of industrial grade message displays and terminals. From the simple display devices through more sophisticated operator terminals, Square D can be your single source supplier for message displays and terminals. For specific ordering information and pricing, contact your local Square D Field Office.

11/97

199 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products General Information

Design of the XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals available: - no operating system - no protocol - no application

Product Line XBTH XBTP XBTE

+

+ XBTL1000 configuration software used with compatible PC to: - select the XBT-H/P display unit or terminal - select the protocol used - design an application on screen - simulate the functions with the control system - download the application

XBT-L1000

Compatible PC

UTW

+

+ MOD

SIE

UNI-TELWAY Siemens

Application

Pg 0 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Pg 3

...

Modbus/Jbus

Design: - of application pages - of alarm pages

Pg 1 MACHINE ADJUSTMENT

Pg 2 MAINTENANCE

Pg 3 TEMPERATURE SPEED

Pg 0

XBTL downloadable communication protocols: - operating system of downloadable products - downloadable applications.

Configuration: - Windows compatible software - user-friendly - “WYSIWYG” type entry (what you see is what you get)

Pg 1

Pg 2

Omron Modicon

Communication

Message Displays or terminals: - Automatic execution of commands transmitted by the PLC XBTP

TSX07 PLC: - Programming communication configured by dialogue table Dialog Table

200 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products General Information

Presentation The XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals comprise 3 families of products : •

XBTH display units - Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display - 2 lines of 20 characters - With or without function keys - 128/256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 200 application pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages - Optional Printer/Log function

XBTH

• XBTP terminals - Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display - 2 lines of 20 characters - Function and service keys - 256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 400 application pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages - Optional Printer/Log function XBTP

• XBTE terminals - Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display - 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters - Function, service and alphanumeric keys - 384 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 800 application pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages - Optional Printer/Log function

XBTE

Description XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals comprise : Front panel : 2

1

1 2 indicator LEDs 2 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display

3 5

3 Function keys with LED, and removable, customizable legend 4 Service keys

4

5 Numeric keys (for XBTP) Alphanumeric keys (for XBTE) Rear panel : - Plug-in terminal block for power supply, 3 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) - Serial port, 25-pin female SUB-D connector - Printer port, 9-pin male SUB-D connector

11/97

201 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Features and Characteristics

Message Displays

XBTH

For selection

Display

Operator Terminals

XBTP

Refer to page 204

Operator Terminals

XBTE

Refer to page 206

Refer to page 208

Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels per character), height 5 mm or LCD backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm. - 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).

Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels per character), height 5 mm or LCD backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm. - 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).

Flat membrane keypad with tactile feedback and 2 mm travel. - 1 version without keys - 4 function keys + 1 service key - 5 service keys

Flat membrane keypad with tactile feedback and 2 mm travel. - 8 function keys + 9 service keys - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys

Flat membrane keypad with tactile feedback and 2 mm travel. - 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys

- 1-2 system indicator LEDs - 0 or 2 service key LEDs - 0 or 4 function key LEDs

- 2 system indicator LEDs - 7 service key LEDs - 8-12 function key LEDs

- 2 system indicator LEDs - 7 service key LEDs - 24 function key LEDs - 1 buzzer

128 kB Flash EEPROM 200 application pages 256 alarm pages

128/256 kB Flash EEPROM 400 application pages 256 alarm pages

384 800 256 400 128

RS232/RS485/RS422 asynchronous serial link

RS232/RS485/RS422 asynchronous serial link

RS232/RS485/RS422 asynchronous serial link

Access to programmable controller real-time clock.

Access to programmable controller real-time clock.

Incorporated real-time clock.

RS232 serial link

RS232 serial link

RS232 serial link

UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens

UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens

UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens

Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels per character), height 5 mm or LCD backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm. - 2 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25) - 4 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)

Keyboard

Signalling

Memory

Transmission

Real-time clock

Printer

Protocols

kB Flash EEPROM application pages - 2 lines/page alarm pages - 2 lines/page application pages - 4 lines/page alarm pages - 4 lines/page

202 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Features and Characteristics

Operator Terminals

Message Displays

XBTM 1- or 2-line display (configurable)

XBTK 1-line display

For selection

Refer to page 210 14 segment fluorescent green, height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m. - 1 line of 20 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40).

Display

Refer to page 210

Memory

Transmission

SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup, holding 160 or 180 messages of 20 characters.

Refer to page 212

Fluorescent green matrix display (128 x 20 pixels) - 1 line of 10 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40) height 20 mm, legible from up to 8 m. - 2 lines of 21 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 2 x 84) height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.

14 segment fluorescent green, height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m. - 1 line of 16 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 32).

3 operator guide inputs (external buttons)

27 key keypad with tactile feedback and 2 mm travel Numeric models: - 12 programmable function keys - 12 numeric input keys - 3 service keys. Alphanumeric models: - 27 alphanumeric input keys - Flat 12 key keypad (F1 to F12 with LED) with covering membrane.

Keyboard

Signalling

XBTA 1-line display (keypad with tactile feedback) Compact flush-mounting

4 system indicator lamps

1 buzzer

EEPROM cartridge, size 24K: 600 messages of 21 characters Log RAM with backup: 100 messages of 21 characters

EEPROM holding 100 messages of 16 characters.

Parallel link RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 asynchronous serial link

Asynchronous serial link

Built-in and backed up by removable lithium battery.

Real-time clock

RS 232C serial link

Printer

Protocols

11/97

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/ SYMAX®/MODBUS

203 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH

Type of display unit

XBTH0•2•10 (fluorescent)

XBTH0•1010 (back-lit LCD)

Conforming to standards

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

Product approvals

UL File E164866 CCN NRAQ

UL File E164866 CCN NRAQ

Temperature

Operation

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

Environment

Degree of protection

CSA File LR 44087 Class 2252 01

CSA File LR 44087 Class 2252 01

Mechanical characteristics Type of mounting and fixing

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Material

Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1) Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

Enclosure Keypad

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Electrical characteristics Display

Fluorescent green matrix for each character, (5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm

Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm

Keys

- 1 version with no keys (XBTH002010) - 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH022010) - 5 service keys (XBTH012•10)

- 1 version with no keys (XBTH001010) - 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH021010) - 5 service keys (XBTH011010)

Voltage

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Voltage limits

18-30 Vdc

18-30 Vdc

Ripple

25 % maximum

25 % maximum

10 W

10 W

- 1 LEDs (XBTH002010) - 6 LEDs (XBTH022010) - 4 LEDs (XBTH012•10) - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010) - 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page

- 1 LEDs (XBTH001010) - 6 LEDs (XBTH021010) - 4 LEDs (XBTH011010) - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010) - 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page

Log function

Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Transmission (asynchronous serial link)

RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422

RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422

Downloadable protocol

Multiple (see page 214)

Multiple (see page 214)

Real-time clock

Access to PLC real-time clock

Access to PLC real-time clock

Printer port (asynchronous serial link) Relay

RS 232 (XBTH012110)

–

–

–

Connection

Power supply

Plug-in terminal block 3 terminals

Plug-in terminal block 3 terminals

Serial port

25-pin female SUB-D connector

25-pin female SUB-D connector

Printer port

9-pin male SUB-D connector

–

Power supply

Consumption

Operating characteristics Signalling Memory

204 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH

Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)

XBTH002010

Download- Possible able links exchange protocol

Supply voltage

Refer to page 214

24

No printer port No log

Language version

Number of keys

Reference

Vdc

Weight lb (kg)

Multilingual

No keys

XBTH002010

1.3 (0.6)

4 function keys 1 service key

XBTH022010

1.3 (0.6)

5 service keys

XBTH012010

1.3 (0.6)

5 service keys

XBTH012110

1.3 (0.6)

XBTH012010

Printer port and log

24

Multilingual

Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD) Download- Possible able links exchange protocol

Supply voltage

Language version

Number of keys

Reference

Weight

Vdc lb (kg)

XBTH001010

Refer to page 214

No printer port No log

24

Multilingual

XBTH021010

No keys

XBTH001010

1.3 (0.6)

4 function keys 1 service key

XBTH021010

1.3 (0.6)

5 service keys

XBTH011010

1.3 (0.6)

Documentation (to be ordered separately) Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E

XBTX000US 0.4(0.2) (1) (1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documention in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish and 1T in Italian.

11/97

205 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP

Type of terminal

XBTP0•2•10 (fluorescent)

XBTP0•1•10 (back-lit LCD)

Environment Conforming to standards

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

Product approvals

UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01

UL File E164866 CCN NRAQ

Temperature

Operation

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

Type of mounting and fixing

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Material

Enclosure

Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)

Keypad

Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

Degree of protection

CSA File LR 44087 Class 2252 01

Mechanical characteristics

Electrical characteristics Display

Fluorescent green matrix for each character, (5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm

Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm

Keys

- 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP012010) - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys(XBTP022•10)

- 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP011010) - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys (XBTP021•10)

Voltage

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Voltage limits

18-30 Vdc

18-30 Vdc

Ripple

25 % maximum

25 % maximum

10 W

10 W

Memory

- 17 LEDs (XBTP012010) - 21 LEDs (XBTP022•10) - 256 kb Flash EEPROM - 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page

- 17 LEDs (XBTP011010) - 21 LEDs (XBTP021•10) - 256 kb Flash EEPROM - 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page

Log function

Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Downloadable protocol

RS 232/RS 485/RS 422

RS 232/RS 485/RS 422

Multiple (see page 214)

Multiple (see page 214)

Real-time clock

Access to PLC real-time clock

Access to PLC real-time clock

Printer port (asynchronous serial link) Relay

RS 232 (XBTP022110)

RS 232 (XBTP021110)

–

–

Connection

Power supply

Plug-in terminal block 3 terminals

Plug-in terminal block 3 terminals

Serial port

25-pin female SUB-D connector

25-pin female SUB-D connector

Printer port

9-pin male SUB-D connector

9-pin male SUB-D connector

Power supply

Consumption

Operating characteristics Signalling

206 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP

Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent) Downloadable exchange protocol

Number of keys Funct. Service Num.

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Weight lb (kg)

No printer port, no log XBTP022010

Refer to page 214

8

9

–

24

Multilingual

XBTP012010

1.8 (0.8)

12

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTP022010

1.8 (0.8)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTP022110

1.8 (0.8)

With printer port and log Refer to page 214

12

Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD) Downloadable exchange protocol

Number of keys Funct. Service Num.

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Weight lb (kg)

No printer port, no log Refer to page 214

8

9

–

24

Multilingual

XBTP011010

1.8 (0.8)

12

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTP021010

1.8 (0.8)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTP021110

1.8 (0.8)

With printer port and log Refer to page 214

12

XBTP021010

Documentation (to be ordered separately) Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E

0.4 (0.2) (1) (1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish and 1T in Italian.

11/97

XBTX000US

207 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE

Type of terminal

XBTE014•10/XBTE016•10 (fluorescent)

XBTE013•10/XBTE015•10 (back-lit LCD)

Conforming to standards

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

Product approvals

UL File E164866 CCN NRAQ

UL File E164866 CCN NRAQ

Temperature

Operation

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 NEMA and UL Type 4

Type of mounting and fixing

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)

Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)

Material

Enclosure

Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)

Keypad

Anti-UV treated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

Environment

Degree of protection

CSA File LR 44087 Class 2252 01

CSA File LR 44087 Class 2252 01

Mechanical characteristics

Electrical characteristics Display

Fluorescent green matrix for each character (5x7 pixels) - 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm

Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), - 2 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm - 4 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm

Keys

- 24 function keys - 10 service keys - 12 alphanumeric keys

- 24 function keys - 10 service keys - 12 alphanumeric keys

Voltage

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Voltage limits

18-30 Vdc

18-30 Vdc

Ripple

25 % maximum

25 % maximum

10 W

10 W

Signalling

- 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer

- 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer

Memory

- 384 kb Flash EEPROM - 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page - 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

- 384 kb Flash EEPROM - 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page - 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Transmission (asynchronous serial link) Real-time clock

RS 232/RS 485/RS 422

RS 232/RS 485/RS 422

Yes (incorporated)

Yes (incorporated)

Printer port (asynchronous serial link) Relay

RS 232 (XBTE014110/XBTE016110)

RS 232 (XBTE013110/XBTE015110)

0.5 A, 24 Vdc

0.5 A, 24 Vdc

Connection

Power supply and parallel port

Plug-in terminal block 5 terminals

Plug-in terminal block 5 terminals

Serial port

25-pin female SUB-D connector

25-pin female SUB-D connector

Printer port

9-pin male SUB-D connector

9-pin male SUB-D connector

Power supply

Consumption

Operating characteristics

Log function

208 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE

Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)

XBTE014010

Downloadable Number of keys exchange Funct. Service Alphanum. protocol No printer port, no log

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Refer to page 214

24

Weight lb (kg)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE014010

2.2 (1.0)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE014110

2.2 (1.0)

With printer port and log Refer to page 214

24

Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent) Downloadable Number of keys exchange Funct. Service Alphanum. protocol No printer port, no log

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Refer to page 214

24

Weight lb (kg)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE016010

2.2 (1.0)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE016110

2.2 (1.0)

With printer port and log XBTE016010

Refer to page 214

24

Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD) Downloadable Number of keys exchange Funct. Service Alphanum. protocol No printer port, no log

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Refer to page 214

24

Weight lb (kg)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE013010

2.2 (1.0)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE013110

2.2 (1.0)

With printer port and log XBTE013010

Refer to page 214

24

Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD) Downloadable Number of keys exchange Funct. Service Alphanum. protocol No printer port, no log

Supply Language voltage version Vdc

Reference

Refer to page 214

24

Weight lb (kg)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE015010

2.2 (1.0)

10

12

24

Multilingual

XBTE015110

2.2 (1.0)

With printer port and log XBTE015010

Refer to page 214

24

Documentation (to be ordered separately) Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E

XBTX000US 0.4 (0.2) (1) (1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish and 1T in Italian.

11/97

209 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM

Type of display unit

XBTK

XBTM

Operation

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529

Type of mounting and fixing

Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners

Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners

Enclosure

Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black satin-finish polyurethane paint

Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black satin-finish polyurethane paint

Fluorescent green, 14 segment - 1 line of 20 characters, height 10 mm

Fluorescent green matrix (128 x 20 pixels) - 1 line of 10 characters, height 20 mm - 2 lines of 21 characters, height 10 mm

Voltage

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Voltage limits

18 to 30 Vdc

18 to 30 Vdc

Ripple

25 % maximum

25 % maximum

10 W

25 W

Visual signalling

–

4 system indicator lights

Memory

Messages

SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup 160 or 180 messages of 20 chars. (depending on model)

EEPROM cartridge 24 K bytes : 600 messages of 21 characters

Log

–

Parallel link

Yes

RAM with lithium battery backup 100 messages of 21 characters Yes

Asynchronous serial link

RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485

RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485

Protocol

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY (depending on model)

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY

Real-Time Clock

–

Yes, with lithium battery back-up

Printer link (Asynchronous serial link) Relays

–

RS 232C

–

1 N/O contact (min. 1 mA/5 Vdc, max. 0.5 A/24 Vdc)

Cabling

Plug-in terminal block 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)

Power supply and relays: Plug-in terminal block with 5 screw terminals (5.08 mm

Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2

Capacity: 1.5 mm2 Parallel link: Plug-in terminal block with 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) Clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2

Serial link

SUB-D 25-pin female connector

SUB-D 25-pin female connector

Printer link

–

SUB-D 9-pin male connector

Environment Temperature

Degree of protection

Mechanical characteristics

Electrical characteristics Display

Power supply

Consumption

Operating characteristics

Transmission

Power supply and parallel link

pitch)

210 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM

1-line display units (1 x 20 characters) Data exchange protocol

Possible links

ASCII No printer link ADJUST No real-time clock UNI-TELWAY

Supply voltage VDC

Language version

24

Multilanguage

Reference

Weight lb (kg)

XBTK801010

4.2 (1.9)

XBTK801010

Display units with 1 line (1 x 10 characters) or 2 lines (2 x 21 characters)

XBTM801010

ASCII No printer link ADJUST No real-time clock UNI-TELWAY No operator guide

24

Multilanguage

XBTM801010

5.3 (2.4)

ASCII With printer link ADJUST UNI-TELWAY

24

Multilanguage

XBTM804110

5.3 (2.4)

Note: XBTM display units are supplied without a TSXMC70E324 EEPROM memory cartridge. Memory cartridges must be ordered separately. (Refer to Software and Accessories on page 214).

11/97

211 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA

Type of terminal

XBTA keypad with tactile feedback

Environment Temperature

Operation

32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage

-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

Degree of protection

IP 65, conforming to IEC 529.

Mechanical characteristics Type of mounting and fixing

Flush-mounting with 4 retractable fasteners

Enclosure

Front panel

Zinc alloy Black satin-finish polyurethane paint

Rear cover

Zinc alloy

Function keys

8 to 12 depending on model

Input keys

12

Service keys

3

Alphanumeric keys

26 (alphanumeric model)

Keypad

Electrical characteristics Display unit (fluorescent/green 14 segment, height 10 mm)

1 line of 16 characters

Power supply

Voltage

24 Vdc

Voltage limits

18 to 30 Vdc (ripple 25 %)

Consumption

10 W

Operating characteristics Signalling

Visual

0 or 4 user indicator lights (depending on model)

Audible

1 buzzer

Memory

Messages

EEPROM: 100 messages of 16 characters

Transmission

Asynchronous serial link

RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485

Protocol

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX/MODBUS

Real-time clock

–

Printer link

–

Connection

Power supply

Plug-in terminal block 3 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2

Serial link

SUB-D 25-pin female connector

Printer link

–

212 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA

Flush-mounting compact terminals, keypad with tactile feedback Data exchange protocol ASCII ADJUST UNI-TELWAY

XBTA801010

Function keys Number

Supply voltage Vdc

Language version

F1 to F12

24

Multilanguage

XBTA801010

4.3 (1.95)

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA811010

4.3 (1.95)

12 with LED

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA821010

4.3 (1.95)

8+4 indicator lights

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA831010

4.3 (1.95)

12 without LED

F1 to F12

24

Multilanguage

XBTA301010

4.3 (1.95)

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA311010

4.3 (1.95)

12 with LED

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA321010

4.3 (1.95)

12 without LED

F1 to F12

24

Multilanguage

XBTA401010

4.3 (1.95)

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA411010

4.3 (1.95)

Legend-plate carrier

24

Multilanguage

XBTA421010

4.3 (1.95)

12 without LED

Marked

Reference

Weight lb (kg)

SY/MAX

ModBus/ JBus

12 with LED

11/97

213 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Software and Accessories

XBTL software (1) Description

Compatibility

Language version

Configuration and terminal software

XBT•3 XBT•7/•8

Multilingual (2) DOS XBTL100 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 DOS XBTL100 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 DOS XBTL400 Multilingual X-TEL (V4 and V5)XBTL940

XBT•4 XBTL1000

XBT•4/•7/•8

Operating system

Reference

Weight lb (kg) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4

(0.65) (0.65) (0.65) (0.65) (0.65) (0.65)

Configuration software XBTH/P/E Multilingual Windows XBTL1000 1.4 (0.65) for display units and terminals (1) XBTL software is supplied in an A5 box including a user's guide and one or two installation diskettes : one 5“1/4 and one 3“1/2 (XBTL900), one 3"1/2 (XBTL940/L1000). (2) English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.

Downloadable protocols (for use with XBTL1000 software) Type of protocol Allen-Bradley Omron UNI-TELWAY Modbus Siemens

Compatibility XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E

Reference XBTL1AB01 XBTL1OMR01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1MOD01 XBTL1SIE01

Weight lb (kg) 1.4 (0.65) 1.4 (0.65) 1.4( 0.65)

Interfaces Connection

Link

Compatibility

Mounting rail

Reference

Weight lb (kg)

Screw terminals

CL/CL

Any XBT

" '

XBTZ9011 XBTZ9012

0.3 (0.12) 0.3 (0.12)

CL/RS 232C or RS 232C/CL

Any XBT

"

XBTZ961

0.3 (0.12)

CL/RS 232C

XBTKL/KN/ML

XBTZ939

0.1 (0.04)

Supply voltage

Compatibility

Reference

24 Vdc/1 A

Any XBT

TBXSUP10

Weight lb (kg) 0.1 (0.04)

24 Vdc/320 mA

Any XBT

8440 PS24

0.1 (0.04)

Size

Compatibility

Reference

4 Kb

XBTKN/M/ML

XBTZ800004

0.1 (0.04)

16 Kb

XBTKN/M

XBTZ800016

0.1 (0.04)

24 Kb

XBTKN/M/TSX 17

TSXMC70E324

0.1 (0.04)

56 Kb

XBTKN/M

XBTZ800056

0.1 (0.04)

88 Kb

XBTKN/M

XBTZ800088

0.1 (0.04)

120 Kb

XBTKN/M

XBTZ800120

0.1 (0.04)

Use

Compatibility

Reference

For real-time clock back-up

XBTKN/M/TSX 17

TSX17ACC1

SUB-D connector 25-pin/25-pin

DC power supply Input voltage 100-240 Vac

EEPROM memory cartridges

PS24

XBTZ800016

Weight lb (kg)

Lithium battery Weight lb (kg) 0.04 ( 0.02)

214 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Software and Accessories

Connection cables for XBTH/P/E Port RS 232C

Transmission PC/PS programming ASCII

Current loop RS 485

ASCII UNI-TELWAY

Plug

Compatibility Any XBT (3) Any XBT (3) Any XBT (3) Any XBT (1) Any XBT (1) Any XBT (1) Any XBT Any XBT (1) Any XBT (1) Any XBT (1) Any XBT (1) XBTH/P/E Any XBT (1)

Length ▲ 8.2 (2.5) 8.2 (2.5) 8.2 (2.5) 8.2 (2.5) 16.4 (5) 6.6 (2) 8.2 (2.5) 5.9 (1.8) 16.4 (5) 16.4 (5) 16.4 (5) 16.4 (5) 8.2 (2.5)

Catalog number XBTZ915 XBTZ905 XBTZ9052 XBTZ905 XBTZ936 XBTZ933 XBTZ906 XBTZ908 XBTZ918 XBTZ948 XBTZ928 XBTZ958 XBTZ968

Connection Compatibility 25-pin (male)-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 25-pin male-5 pin XBTH/P/E male

Length ▲ 8.2 (2.5) 8.2 (2.5)

Catalog number XBTZ915 XBTZ909

Connection 9-pin (male) 25-pin (female) 25-pin (male) – Serial printer XBT/XBTZ961 – TSXSCA 62 TSXSCM 21•6 TSXP•••425 TSXSCG 1161 TSX17 TSX07/37

(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals (2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function. (3) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.

Cables for Open Protocol for XBTH/P/E Port/Transmission RS 232/RS 485 RS 232

SUB-D Adaptors for Open Protocol Adaptor Female adaptor Female adaptor Male adaptor Male adaptor Male adaptor RS232/Current Loop

Connection RJ45-25 pin female RJ45-9 pin female RJ45-9 pin male RJ45-15 pin male RJ45-25 pin male 25 pinmale-25 pin female

Compatibility XBTZ900 XBTZ900 XBTZ900 XBTZ900 XBTZ900 XBTZ939

Catalog number XGVSZ2510 XGVSZ0910 XGVSZ0920 XGVSZ1520 XGVSZ2520 XBTZ939

Cables for ModBus Protocol Port/Transmission RS 232/RS 485 RS 232/RS 485 RS 232/RS 485

Connection RJ45-RJ45 RJ45-RJ45 RJ45-RJ45

Compatibility XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E

Length ▲ 3 (.91) 6 (1.8) 12 (3.6)

Catalog number 110XCA28201 110XCA28202 110XCA28203

SUB-D Adaptors for ModBus Protocol Adaptor Male adaptor Female adaptor Male adaptor Female adaptor

Connection RJ45-9 pin 9male RJ45-9 pin female RJ45-25 pin male RJ45-25 pin female

Compatibility XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E XBTH/P/E

Catalog number 110XCA20301 110XCA20302 110XCA20401 110XCA20402

Mounting rail – –

Catalog number TSXPACC01 TFTXCBP025

Any XBT

–

XBTZ961

XBTH/P/E

–

XBTZ939

▲ feet (meters)

Interfaces Connection Dual port connection Simulation Current Loop SUB-D connector 25-pin/25-pin

11/97

Link UNI-TELWAY RS 485/RS 232 converter CL/RS 232C or RS 232C/CL CL/RS 232C

Compatibility TSX07/37 TSX07/37

215 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Software and Accessories

Connection cables for XBTA/K/M Port RS 232C

Transmission PC/PS

Any XBT (4)

Length ft (m) 8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ915

Weight lb (kg) 0.4 (0.2)

25-pin (female) Any XBT (1)

8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ905

0.4 (0.21)

25-pin (male)

Any XBT (1)

8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ9052

0.4 (0.21)

–

Any XBT (1)

8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ905

0.4 (0.21)

Serial printer

XBTM

16.4 (5)

XBTZ936

0.4 (0.2)

XBT/XBTZ961

Any XBT (1)

6.6 (2)

XBTZ933

0.4 (0.2)

XBT/SYMAX

Any XBT

8.2 (2.5)

8010CC108

0.4 (0.2)

ASCII

–

Any XBT

8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ906

0.4 (0.21)

ADJUST

TSX47-40

Any XBT (2)

8.2 (2.5)

XBTZ902

0.4 (0.21)

UNITELWAY

TSXSCA62

Any XBT (1)

5.9 (1.8)

XBTZ908

0.5 (0.24)

TSXSCM 21•6

Any XBT (1)

16.4 (5)

XBTZ918

0.5 (0.23)

TSXP•••425

Any XBT (1)

16.4 (5)

XBTZ948

0.5 (0.23)

TSXSCG 1161

Any XBT (1)

16.4 (5)

XBTZ928

0.5 (0.24)

TSX17

XBTH/P/E (3)

16.4 (5)

XBTZ958

0.5 (0.24)

TSX17

Any XBT (1)

16.4 (5)

XBTZ917

0.5 (0.21)

1.6 (0.5)

XBTZ9171

0.5 (0.21)

ASCII

Current loop

RS 485

XBTZ902

ADJUST

XBTZ928

Plug

Connection

Compatibility

9-pin (male)

Reference

TSX07/37

Any XBT (1)

0.8 (0.25) XBTZ968

Number of sheets 1

Use with

Number of labels 12 24 24 32

0.4 (0.18)

Function key labels Color Grey

(1) (2) (3) (4)

XBTH02•010 XBTP01•010 XBTP02••10 XBTE01••10

Reference XBLYH4 XBLYP8 XBLYP12 XBLYE24

Weight lb (kg) 0.2 (0.1) 0.2 (0.1) 0.2 (0.1) 0.2 (0.1)

Including XBTH/P/E terminals. Add the XBTZ939 module for XBTKL/KN/ML. XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function. For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.

216 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines

Cables for connecting XBT terminals and devices/peripherals

Devices

Protocols

Connecting cables XBT Z902 (1)

FTX417 FTX507

PC RS 232 tsx07

XBT Z905

XBT XBT Z9052 Z908

XBT Z915

XBT Z917

XBT Z918

XBTZ928

XBT Z948

XBT Z968

XBT Z958 (2)

ASCII

25-pin (female)

ASCII

25-pin (male)

ASCII

9-pin (male)

ASCII

TSX07

Te

UNI-TELWAY TSX17 ADJUST TSX 17

TSX SCG1161 UNI-TELWAY UNI-TELWAY

TSX47-40

ADJUST

TSXSCM 21•6 UNI-TELWAY TSXSCA 62 UNI-TELWAY

TSXP•••425 + TSXLES 64 Peripherals

UNI-TELWAY

Links

Connecting cables XBTZ936

Printer

Serial

XBTM

Connecting cables to be used. Example : XBTZ917 cable to connect TSX17 (ADJUST) PLC with XBT (1) Add XBTZ939 module (20 mA current loop/RS 232C interface) for XBTKL/KN/ML (2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.

11/97

217 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Compatibility Tables

Compatibility Table for Protocols/Cables for MAGELiSTM PLC Series TELE

XBT Status Type TSX07 Terminal Port Slave TSX37 Terminal Port Slave TSX37 Terminal Port+SCA Slave TSX37 + PCMCIA Terminal Port+SCA Slave TSX17 Terminal Port Master TSX17 TSXSCG 1161 Slave TSX Series 7 TSXP...425 Slave +TSXLES 64 TSX Series 7 TSXSCA 62 Slave TSX Series 7 TSXSCM 21.6 Slave

MODICON

MICRO MODICON 984 QUANTUM

COMM 1 984 ModBus Port ModBus Port

SIEMENS

S5-90U S5-95U S5-95U S5-105U S5-105U S5-115U S5-115U S5-135U S5-135U

Terminal Port Port communication Terminal Port Module Terminal Port Module Terminal Port Module Terminal Port

ALLEN BRADLEY

SLC500

OMRON

PLC Model

XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01

Protocol Name (Part Number) Unitelway 2.0 Unitelway 2.0 Unitelway 2.0 Unitelway 2.0 Unitelway 1.0 Unitelway 1.0 Unitelway 1.0

Type of to Install RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485

Type of Physical Layer DIN DIN DIN DIN SUB-D SUB-D SUB-D

Cable Connection PLC XBTZ968 XBTZ968 XBTZ968+SCA62+ACC01 XBTZ908+SCA62 XBTZ958 XBTZ928 XBTZ948

XBTL1UTW01 XBTL1UTW01

Unitelway 1.0 Unitelway 1.0

RS 485 RS 485

SUB-D SUB-D

XBTZ908 XBTZ918

Master Master Master

XBTL1MOD01 XBTL1MOD01 XBTL1MOD01

MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS

RS 232 RS 232 RS 232

RJ 45 SUB-D 25 male SUB-D 25 male

XBTZ900+XGVSZ+Adapt. XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910 XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910

– – – – – – – – –

XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01 XBTL1SIE01

AS511 3964R AS511 3964R AS511 3964R AS511 3964R AS511

Current Loop RS 232 Current Loop RS 232 Current Loop RS 232 Current Loop RS 232 Current Loop

SUB-D 15 female SUB-D 15 female SUB-D 15 female SUB-D 25 female SUB-D 15 female SUB-D 25 female SUB-D 15 female SUB-D 25 female SUB-D 15 female

XBTZ939+XBTZ909 XBTZ900+XGVSZ1520 XBTZ939+XBTZ909 XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520 XBTZ939+XBTZ909 XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520 XBTZ939+XBTZ909 XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520 XBTZ939+XBTZ909

Terminal Port

Master

XBTL1AB01

DF1

RS 232

SUB-D 9 male

XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910

PLC5

Terminal Port

–

XBTL1AB01

DF1

RS 232

SUB-D 25 female

XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520

COM1 C200Hx

Terminal Port Terminal Port Terminal Port

Master Master Master

XBTL1OMR01 XBTL1OMR01 XBTL1OMR01

SYSMAC SYSMAC SYSMAC

RS 232 RS 232 RS 232

SUB-D 9 female SUB-D 9 female SUB-D 9 female

XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920 XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920 XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920

CV

Connection

Protocol

Chemical Compatibility Table for MAGELiSTM Resistance of Chemical Agents ACIDS Nitric Acid Sulfuric Acid Citric Acid Chloric Acid ALCOHOLS Ethanol Glycol Methanol HYDROCARBONS Hexan Gasoline, Fuels Grease Hydraulic Oils Cutting Oils SOLVENTS Trichlorethylene Trichlorethane Acetone White Spirits AGRO-CULTURAL PRODUCTS Vegetable Oils Animals Fats Fruit Juices Milk (Lactic Acid)

Concentration

Temperature

Enclosure PPO •

Keypad Polyester PET ••

10% 50% 10% 50%

+20 °C +20 °C +20 °C +20 °C

S S S S

L N S S

100% 100% 100%

+20 °C +20 °C +20 °C

S ? L

S S L

100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

+20 °C +20 °C +20 °C +20 °C +20 °C

S N S S S

S S S S S

100% 100% 100% 100%

+20 °C +20 °C +20 °C +20 °C

N N N L

L L L S

100% 100% 100% 100%

+20 °C +20 °C +20 °C +20 °C

S L ? S

S S ? S

S: Satisfactory for the temperature indicated L: Limited for the temperature indicated N: Non-satisfactory ?: Unknown, testing required • Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1) •• Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

218 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility

XBT software/XBT terminal compatibility Terminal

Software XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL400 XBTL400 XBTL900 V1.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V1.1 V1.2 V ≤ 1.2 (DOS, and V1.1 Windows)

XBTL900 XBTL940 XBT V ≥ 1.3 V1.1 L1000 (DOS,

(OS/2,

(DOS,

Windows)

X-TEL)

Window)

XBTA7/K7/KL7 XBTA8 XBTA3 XBTA4 XBTM/ML XBTKN XBTH/P/E Compatible

XBT environmental compatibility The XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane has been subjected to trials in collaboration with DIVERSEY and HENKEL HYGIENE, whose detergents and disinfectant products are commonly used in the agrifoodstuffs industry. Under normal conditions of use, the XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane suffered no ill-effects after 200 hours being immersed in the following products : DIVERSEY detergent and disinfectant products SEPTINEIGE PLUS Self-lathering disinfecting neutral detergent, 1 to 4% and 20 °C. DIVOSAN MEZZO Broad spectrum oxidizing acid disinfectant, 0.5% and 20 °C. DILAC NEIGE Self-lathering acid detergent, 3 to 5% and 20 °C. DIVONEIGE ML Self-lathering mild alkaline detergent, 2 to 5% and 20 °C. CHLORINEIGE 400 Chlorinated self-lathering alkaline detergent, 1 to 5% and 20 °C. HENKEL HYGIENE detergent and disinfectant products P3 - FORMAKLAR Broad spectrum non-oxidizing neutral disinfectant, tested at 4 % and 20 °C. P3 - OXONIA ACTIF Strong oxidizing disinfectant, tested at 0.5% and 20 °C. P3 - TOPAX M ACIDE Self-lathering acid disinfectant, tested at 2% and 40 °C. P3 - TOPAX M 55 Chlorinated self-lathering disinfecting alkaline detergent, tested at 5 % and 50 °C. P3 - HOROLITH M Self-lathering acid detergent, tested at 5% and 20 °C.

11/97

219 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Dimensions

Dimensions

Message display XBTH

2 50

in (mm)

0.3 5.9 4.016 (102)

CUT-OUT

3.6 89.6

0.3 7

7.3 183.8

0.3 6.2

.217 (5.5)

7.953 (202)

3.58 (91)

4 102

0.5 12.4

Inches mm

ENTER

8 202

0.3 6.2

.335 (8.5)

7.28 (185)

.472 (12)

.335 (8.5)

Depth =

± 0.5 mm

1.96 (50)

2.2 55.4

Operator terminal XBTP

0.3 7.1

0.3 8.5

9.3 234.5

0.3 6.2

.217 (5.5)

10 (253)

0.4 10

6 (152)

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

+/-

0

.

DEL HOME

SYST

ESC

MENU

+1

5.295 (134.5)

6 152

5.3 133.3

CUT-OUT

PRINT

MOD

ALARM

-1

SHIFT

ENTER

.315 (8)

10 253

0.5 12.5

9.308 (235.5)

.374 (9.5)

.472 (12) Depth = 2.18 (55)

± 0.5 mm

2.3 58

Operator terminal XBTE

0.3 7

0.4 9.2 0.3 7

10.5 264

.236 (6)

11.496 (292)

0.7 18.8

7.953 (202)

ABC

HOME

ESC

SYST

+1

MENU

DEF

GHI

7

8

9

JKL

MNO

PQR

4

5

6

STU

VWX

YZ

1

2

3

+/±

0

∑

7.244 (184)

8 202.5

7.2 182.5

CUT-OUT DEL

in (mm)

PRINT

MOD

ALARM

SHIFT

-1

ENTER

.335 (8.5) 0.5 13

11.6 292

10.453 (265.5)

.709 (18)

.472 (12) Depth = 2.28 (58)

± 0.5 mm

220 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Dimensions

Dimensions

Message displays XBTK

XBTM

(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 276 x 61.5 ±0.5 mm(10.87 x 2.42 ± 0.02 in) (2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in.) Terminals

(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 275.5 x 88.5 ± 0.5 mm.(10.85 x 3.48 ± 0.02 in) (2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in)

Inches mm

XBTA

(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 231 x 145.5 ± 0.5 mm. (9.09 x 5.73 ± 0.02 in) (2) Support thickness: 10 mm (0.39 in)

11/97

221 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Technical Documentation

Type

Language

XBTH/P/E terminals

French German English Spanish Italian

XBTK message displays

French German English Spanish Italian

XBTM message displays

French German English Spanish Italian

XBTA terminals

French German English Spanish Italian

XBT Terminal Utilization Handbook

French German English Spanish Italian

ASCII + ADJUST

UNI-TELWAY

MULTI-PROTOCOL

XBTX000FR XBTX000DE XBTX000US XBTX000ES XBTX000IT

XBTXK700F XBTXK700D XBTXK700E XBTXK700S XBTXK700T

XBTXK800F XBTXK800D XBTXK800E XBTXK800S XBTXK800T

XBTXM800F XBTXM800D XBTXM800E XBTXM800S XBTXM800T

XBTX63255 XBTX63257 XBTX63256 XBTX63258 XBTX63259

XBTXA800F XBTXA800D XBTXA800E XBTXA800S XBTXA800T

XBTXD800 FR XBTXD800 DE XBTXD800 EN XBTXD800 ES XBTXD800 1T

XBT installation bulletins supplied with the product are in English. If additional technical manuals or specific catalogs are needed, they may be purchased separately. For specific ordering information and pricing regarding the products shown in this catalog, contact your local Square D Field Office.

222 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E

Control system architectures By remotely downloading protocols from a variety of manufacturers, MAGELiS terminals can easily be integrated with many popular PLCs. Remote loading of protocols also provides: ● minimum stock with maximum effectiveness. ● convenient updating of installed base of products and protocols as new versions are introduced. ● point-to-point or multidrop PLC communication. Factory network

Supervision Level 2

ETHERNET/ETHWAY/FIPWAY/…networks

Machine Control Level 1 • Programmable controllers • Numerical controllers

• Inter-product communication • Operator interface

Third party PLC

TSX7 UNI-TELWAY bus

Downloadable protocol

• Workshop terminals (factory floor programming)

TSX17

XBTH

XBTE

XBTP

Single Machine Downloadable protocol TSX07

Downloadable protocol XBTH Modicon

11/97

XBTP

223 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M

UNI-TE protocol ● ●

Y

WA I-TEL

UN

Serial link Multi-station UNI-TE data exchange protocol.

Using the XBT terminal in a multi-station network architecture. ● Automatic data exchanges with numerous Telemecanique devices: variable speed controller weighing system numerical controller ● Direct access to the device variables. The PLC program is very reduced or non-existent.

ADJUST protocol ● ●

Serial link Point-to-point data exchange protocol with TSX7® PLCs.

Using the XBT terminal with TSX7 PLCs. ● Connect to the terminal port of the TSX7 PLC (no special board in the PLC). ● Direct access to the TSX7 PLC variables. The PLC program is very reduced or non-existent.

Selection of data exchange protocol

ASCII protocol ● ●

Serial link Universal data exchange protocol compatible with SY/MAX PLCs.

Using the XBT terminal with a Serial Link ● Connect to any programmable control system which has a serial link, including SY/MAX programmable controllers.

Parallel link (24 V) Using parallel connected message displays ● Connect to any hard wired or programmable control system. ● No special board required.

224 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNIT Man-Machine Dialogue Activity Management WE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA 40, Avenue A.Morizet 92100 Boulogne-Billancourt FRANCE declare under our own responsibility that the products(s): TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUE NAME, TYPE: Display units MODELS: XBT-K, -KL, -M,-KN, -HL, -H NAME, TYPE: Operator dialogue terminals with keypad LEDs MODELS: XBT-BB NAME, TYPE: Operator dialogue terminals MODELS: XBT-A, -E, -P NAME, TYPE: Operator dialogue terminals MODELS: XBT-VA, -VM to which this declaration refers conform to : STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS: Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1) Programmable controllers IEC 1131 Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081-2 Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice, the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives: Low-voltage Directive N°73/23/EEC EMC Directive N°89/336/EEC The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds the reference technical file available to the European Union authorities. Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995

Authorized Signatory Name: Xavier Robineau Bourgneuf Title: DHM Activity Director Signature:

ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.

225 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNIT Man-Machine Dialogue Activity Management WE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA 40, Avenue A.Morizet 92100 Boulogne-Billancourt FRANCE declare under our own responsibility that the products(s): TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUE NAME, TYPE: Pushbuttons and pilot lights MODELS: XB2-B.., ZA2-B.., XB2-M.., Domino, XB2-E.., XVL... NAME, TYPE: Control Stations MODELS: XAL-.., XAP-.. NAME, TYPE: Rotary switches MODELS: XBC-D.., K1.., K2.. NAME, TYPE: Illuminated indicator bank MODELS: XVA.. to which this declaration refers conform to : STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS: Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1) Electromechanical control circuit devices IEC 947-5-1 (EN60947-5-1) Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice, the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives: Low-voltage Directive N°73/23/EEC EMC Directive N°89/336/EEC The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds the reference technical file available to the European Union authorities. Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995

Authorized Signatory Name: Xavier Robineau Bourgneuf Title: DHM Activity Director Signature:

ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.

226 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.

declare that the product range:Square D Class 9001 Type T Push Buttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights and Contact Blocks.

Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance with currently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, complies with the provisions of Council Directives: Low Voltage Directive Amendment 1

73/23/EEC 93/68/EEC

EMC Directive Amendments

89/336/EEC 91/263/EEC 92/31/EEC 93/68/EEC

The above product is in conformity with the following standards: BS EN 60947-1 Underwriters Laboratory UL 508 National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2 Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987

Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.

Name . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD .................................... Function . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................

227 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.

declare that the product range:Square D Class 9001 Type TY and KY Enclosures

Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance with currently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, complies with the provisions of Council Directives: Low Voltage Directive Amendment 1

73/23/EEC 93/68/EEC

The above product is in conformity with the following standards: BS EN 60947-1 Underwriters Laboratory UL 508 National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2 Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987

Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.

Name. . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD..................................... Function. . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................

228 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY WE:

Square D Company 128 Bingham Road Asheville, NC 28802

Declare that the products: BRAND: SquareD NAME, TYPE: Class 9001, Type KM, KMF, “Light Modules” “ “ , Type KA, “Contact Blocks” “ “ , Type K, KX, SK, SKRU, “30 mm Operators” “ “ , Type BW, SKYP “Pendant Stations” Class 9002, Type AW, “Foot Switches”

To which this declaration refers are in conformity with: The following Standards or Normative Documents: - General rules: EN60947.1 - Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1

subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.

Meet the provisions of the following Directives:

No. 73/23/CCE of February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/EC of July 22, 1993. No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive, modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.

The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds the reference technical file available to the European Authorities.

Executed at Raleigh: October 22, 1997

Authorized Signature:

Name: Neil Tollas Position: Director, Logic Control Signature:

229 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY WE:

Square D Company 128 Bingham Road Asheville, NC 28802

Declare that the products: BRAND: Telemecanique NAME, TYPE: XVA LED LAMPS MODELS: XVAD•••B120, XVAD•••C024

To which this declaration refers are in conformity with: The following Standards or Normative Documents: - General rules: EN60947.1 - Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1

subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.

Meet the provisions of the following Directives:

No. 73/23/CCE of February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/EC of July 22, 1993. No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive, modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.

The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds the reference technical file available to the European Authorities.

Executed at Raleigh: April 10, 1997

Authorized Signature:

Name: Neil Tollas Position: Director, Logic Control Signature:

230 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

11/97

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide Declaration of Conformity

NOTES:

231 11/97

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

Square D Company P.O. Box 27446 Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA Schneider Canada 6675 Rexwood Road Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1V1 www.squared.com

O/S2 is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation and are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratory is a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association  Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc. SY/MAX is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc. MAGELiS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA UNI-TELWAY is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA X/TEL is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA TSX 7 is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA FINGERSAFE is a registered trademark of Square D Company is a trademark of Square D Company SERIPLEX is a registered trademark of Square D Company ™

9001CT9701 replaces the following: 9001CT9501, dated 1/96 9001CT9601, dated 11/96 9001CT9602, dated 11/96 9001CT9603, dated 11/96 9001CT9604, dated 1/97 9001CT9605, dated 1/97 9001CT9606, dated 1/97 9001CT9607, dated 1/97 9001CT9608, dated 1/97 9001CT9609, dated 2/97

Square D and

are registered trademarks of Square D Company.

Catalog No. 9001CT9701 November 1997 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved.